Home

HP LaserJet 4700 Printer

1. 1 Jammed paper 2 Crumpled paper in the fuser ENWW Clearing jams 215 Clearing a jam in the top cover area WARNING Do not touch the fuser It is hot and could cause burns The fuser s operating temperature is 190 C 374 F Wait ten minutes to allow the fuser to cool before touching the fuser 1 Open the top and front covers 3 Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down i ae 216 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW 4 Grasp the media by both corners and pull down LS Troy Mem ag 7 M F m V TIALLY A i OC COCB SJ g if lii pe fE g 5 Close the transfer unit L7 e ng a y 7 6 Close the top and front covers vari ENWW Clearing jams 217 Clearing other jams 1 Using the handles open the top and front covers 2 i ir i 3 IFE ee fo nl E NOTE If no media is present at these locations continue to the next step 218 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW 4 Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down De AN H a a n CQ vO WS Ve lt U E ZETA y ai po D E mou Cos EIKE va Fl 8206 l cot a ENWW Clearing jams 219 7 Close the tra
2. ccccccccecccceeceeeeceeeeceseeceseecesseeeeeeeeeseeeeseceseeceseeersneetseees 29 Upaan TAG NAE coin capa riercrnce A E EET 29 Activating the two sided printing duplexing mode ccceeecceeseeeeseeeecaeeeeeeeeeseeeesaaeeeaeees 29 Activating the Economode printing mode cccecceceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseeesaeeesaeeeanees 29 Changing the toner density cccccccceseeceeseeeseeceeceseecceeeeceueeeceueeeseaeeeseaeeesueessegeeeseeeenees 30 Changing the resolution settings cccccceccceeeeseeeceeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeeseeeens 30 Locking or unlocking printer storage devices ccecccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseneeeseeetsaees 30 Saving or printing stored JODS naanenenenennnennoennroerensrrrsnnnsnrrrnresnnrrererarersnrrsrersnresnnrrnnrrsnner 30 CORGU UA esa E E E E E EEE NEE 31 Changing network settings iscteescceuwrdsewcsosterninedlivarauchieresavovauladabiesaueseheaduwusbesvidadosasautundeeanets 31 Opening the embedded Web server cccccceeeccceeeccessecceeeeeceaeeeceueeessueeesueesseaeeneneeeeess 31 Setting UP e maill Aleris 2 0 0 ccc ceeccccssecceseeecessecceaceecueecseueecsuueessueeeceueeesaeeessegeessaeeeseaeeesas 32 Prnt media Se CIS CAA ONS sssini a E EERE EEE E E E a S aSa 33 Supported Media weights and SIZES ccccecccseccceececeecceeeeceeeeseeeeeeeessueeseessueessueeseeeesaeesens 33 WMTOCUCMON eime ie EE E
3. 1 Long edge landscape This layout is often used in accounting data processing and spreadsheet programs Every other printed image is oriented upside down Facing pages are read continuously from top to bottom ENWW Using features in the printer driver 117 B 2 Short edge landscape Each printed image is oriented right side up Facing pages are read from top to bottom on the left page then from top to bottom on the right page 3 Long edge portrait This is the default setting and the most common layout used with every printed image oriented right side up Facing pages are read from top to bottom on the first page then from top to bottom on the second page 4 Short edge portrait This layout is often used with clipboards Every other printed image is oriented upside down Facing pages are read continuously from top to bottom Setting the stapling options You can select whether a job is stapled by using the printer driver To set the stapling options 1 Open the printer driver properties and click the Configure tab The Configure tab is not available from within software programs EA NOTE The procedure to open the printer driver properties depends on the operating system that you are using For information about opening the printer driver properties for your operating system see Gaining access to the printer drivers Look for the
4. RARP An acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol a protocol that enables a computer or peripheral to determine its own IP address raster image An image composed of dots render The process of outputting text or graphics RGB An acronym for colors red green and blue ROM An acronym for read only memory a type of computer memory used to store data that should not be changed supplies Materials used by the printer that are used up and must be replaced Supply items for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer are the four print cartridges the transfer belt and the fuser TCP IP An internet protocol developed by the U S Department of Defense that has become the global standard for communications toner The fine black or colored powder that forms the image on the printed media transfer unit The black plastic belt that transports the media inside the printer and transfers the toner from the print cartridges onto the media tray A receptacle for holding blank media xerographic paper General term for paper intended for photocopy or laser printer use XHTML An acronym for extensible hypertext markup language ENWW Glossary 305 306 Glossary ENWW Index Symbols Numerics 2 sided printing 125 A accessories hard disk 8 ordering 2 7 accessory port 86 address printer Macintosh troubleshooting 243 246 alerts configuring 175 e mail 147 auto continue 73 autocontinue black 249 automatic media sensing 95
5. The correct printer and port are not selected on the computer Select the correct printer and port The network is not configured properly for this printer Use the network software to verify the printer s network configuration or consult with the network administrator The power source receptacle is not working correctly Connect the printer to a different power receptacle aa ENWW Printer response problems 23 7 Printer control panel problems Control panel setting Table 8 15 Control panel settings work incorrectly Cause and solution Cause Solution The printer control panel display is blank or is not lit even when the fan is running Printer settings in the printing software application or printer driver differ from the printer control panel settings Control panel settings were not correctly saved after they were changed The Data indicator light is lit and there are no pages printing If the printer is on a network another user might have changed printer control panel settings Fans might run while the printer is in standby mode off Press the printer s on off button to turn the printer on Confirm that the settings in the application and printer driver are appropriate since the application settings override the printer driver and control panel settings and the printer driver settings override the control panel settings For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintos
6. 4 Press and to step through the instructions 1 To use the device without the data press vV 2 To solve the problem add more memory to the device DDR SDRAM Memory 128MB Q2630A or 256MB Q2631A No action necessary Turn the printer off then on If the error persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 No action necessary Load the correct paper in Tray 1 and press v to continue If prompted confirm the size and type of paper loaded 1 Ifthe correct paper is loaded press v 2 Otherwise remove the incorrect paper and load Tray 1 with the specified paper ENWW Control panel messages 197 Control panel message Description Recommended action To continue press v alternates with LOAD TRAY 1 lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press LOAD TRAY 1 lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt To use another tray press v Alternates with LOAD TRAY 1 lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE For help press LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To use another tray press v alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE For help press Loading program X DO NOT POWER OFF MANUALLY FEED lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt alternates with To use another tray press v This message appears when Tray 1 is selected but is not loaded and other paper trays are available for use This message appears when Tray XX is selected but is not loaded and
7. A list of available modes appears A list of available parameters appears BELT CONTACT CACO3 PAPER TALC PAPER BACKGROUND 1 BACKGROUND 2 TRANSPARENCY MEDIA TYPE REGISTRATION LONG PAPER that is printed on the front with the image that is printed on the back PRINT TEST PAGE Prints a test page that shows the current registration settings SOURCE Allows you to select the tray for which you want to print the test page If installed optional trays appear as selections where N is the number of the tray ADJUST TRAY N Sets the registration fro the specified tray where N is the number of the tray A selection appears for each tray that is installed and registration must be set for each tray e X1 SHIFT Registration of the image on the paper from side to side as the paper lies in the tray For duplexing this side is the second side back of the paper e X2 SHIFT Registration of the image on the paper from side to side as the paper lies in the tray for the first side front of a duplexed page This item appears only if a duplexer is installed and enabled Set the X1 SHIFT first e Y SHIFT Registration of the image on the paper from top to bottom as the paper lies in the tray Allows you to set trays to automatically sense the type of paper loaded For more information see the section entitled Automatic media type sensing auto sense mode Allows you to associate each media type with a
8. ENWW Environmental specifications 293 294 AppendixD Printer specifications ENWW E Regulatory information ENWW 295 FCC regulations FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions it may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase separation between equipment and receiver e Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located e Consult your dealer or an experienced radio TV technician Ex NOTE Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15
9. STOP AUTOCONTINUE BLACK AUTO OFF ON AUTO OFF A listing of available languages appears pauses until the color supply is replaced OVERRIDE AT OUT allows printing to continue when a color supply is out but displays a warning that override is in use and that the supply must be replaced The user can set the percent remaining at which the ORDER AT message is displayed The default is 15 Sets the COLOR SUPPLY OUT printer behavior when a color supply is empty When the printer is set to AUTOCONTINUE BLACK the printer will continue printing using black toner only The default is STOP Sets whether the printer will attempt to reprint pages after a jam The default is AUTO Allows you to specify how the RAM disk is configured When set to AUTO the printer determines the optimal RAM disk size based on the amount of available memory The default is AUTO This message displays in models that do not have a hard disk installed Sets the default language The default language is ENGLISH Stapler stacker menu This menu is available if a stapler stacker is installed on the printer Menu item Values Description STAPLES NONE The STAPLES menu defines how the stapler stacker processes a job that has no 1 EDGE stapling instructions The device can be configured to staple the job 1 EDGE or to not staple the job NONE The default is NONE Only supported paper sizes can be stapled ENWW Configure dev
10. 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select File Upload 3 Click Choose navigate to the file that you want to upload and then click OK 4 Click Upload to load the file 28 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW Uploading fonts to the printer Add fonts from the computer to the printer 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Upload Fonts 3 Inthe Fonts in printer s pop up menu select where you want the fonts to be stored on the printer The fonts in that storage device appear in the list that appears below the pop up menu 4 Click Add and navigate to the font file that you want to upload to the printer 5 Click Upload to upload the font to the printer EA NOTE To remove a font from the printer open the HP Printer Utility select Upload Fonts select the correct storage device in the pop up menu select the font that you want to delete and then click Remove Updating the firmware Update the printer firmware by loading the new firmware file from the computer You can find new firmware files for your printer at www hp com 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Firmware Update 3 Click Choose navigate to the firmware file that you want to upload and then click OK 4 Click Upload to load the firmware file Activating the two sided printing duplexing mode Turn on the two sided printing feature on printers equipped with automatic duplexers 1 Ope
11. 3 On the Control Panel Access Level pop up menu select the access level that you want to set for the printer control panel 4 Select the devices that you want to lock and clear any devices that you want to unlock 5 Click Apply Now Saving or printing stored jobs Turn on the printer job storing function or print a stored job from the computer You also can delete a stored print job 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Stored Jobs 3 Perform any of the following tasks e Toturn on the job storing function select Enable Job Storing and then click Apply Now e Toprinta stored job select a stored job in the list type the necessary personal identification number PIN in the Enter Secure Job PIN box type the number of copies that you want in the Copies to Print box and then click Print e Todelete a stored job select a stored job in the list and then click Delete 30 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW ENWW Configuring trays Change the default printer tray settings from the computer 1 2 3 5 6 Open the HP Printer Utility In the Configuration Settings list select Trays Configuration In the Trays list select the tray to be configured EA NOTE To make the selected tray the default tray for printing click Make Default In the Default Media Size pop up menu select the default media size for the tray In the Default Media Type pop up menu select the default med
12. 3 On the File menu click on Properties 4 Select the Device Settings tab 5 Use either of the following methods to select the stapler stacker e Scroll down to Automatic Configuration select Update Now and click Apply e Scroll down to Accessory Output Bin select HP 750 Sheet Stapler Stacker and click Apply Using the stapler stacker 129 Macintosh 1 Open the Printer Center utility Select HP Color LaserJet 4700 On the File menu click on Show Info X I 2 3 4 Select the Installable Options tab 5 Scroll to Accessory Output Bins and select HP 750 Sheet Stapler Stacker 6 Click on Apply Changes Selecting the printer behavior at staples out When the stapler cartridge runs out of staples jobs will print to the stapler stacker if the stapler is configured to CONTINUE If the stapler is configured to STOP when the stapler cartridge is empty the printer stops printing any jobs until the cartridge is replaced For more information see Stapler stacker menu 1 Press Menu to enter the menus 2 Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE and then press v 3 Press to highlight STAPLER STACKER and then press v 4 Press to highlight STAPLES OUT and then press v 5 Press to highlight STOP or CONTINUE and then press v Printing to the stapler stacker The stapler stacker can hold up to 750 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper with job offset Standard and custom paper sizes are accepted but only letter A4 JI
13. 601s eae E ee en ec ee er meee ee eee een 92 FBGA SIZE nei E N E E N EE E E 92 PANSRING PHONUOS spise E E E A E E ENE 92 Selecting Pint MEIA seseina enua EE TEELT N EAEE E ENDATE EEEE EEEE ENEE Ea 94 Veda O AYOO e E E E E E E 94 Paper that can damage the printer ccc cceccc ccc seeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaeesaeeeaeeeeeeees 94 Automatic media type sensing auto SENSE mode cccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeseeeesaeeesaeeeess 95 Toy SOM SURG oe EE nictdenaptientoaanayahnesencmenontentadamsentapaeiandantaeineatuaestansiadanantiins 95 Tay 22 IN SINS ING sie Seciecaboctenscutideceedentianuncdaeadnaeden NS 96 COE UTC UE A S acest sorte cate a E E a oneemanenne E A 97 Configuring trays when the printer gives a prompt cc cccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeens 97 Configuring a tray when loading paper ccccecceceeececeeeeecaeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeseeeesaaeeeseeeeseeeeneeeens 97 Configuring a tray to match print job settings ccc ecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaeeeaeeeeseeeens 98 Configuring trays using the paper handling MENU cccceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeens 98 Configuring Tray 2 and optional trays for a custom paper SIZE cece cece seeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 99 Printing from Tray 1 multipurpose tray c ccc cccceeceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesseeeeseaeesaaeeesaeeesees 100 HO ACN MAN A atacatci ct tes clewrcees en E E E EE 100 Pr
14. 65 X X OUTPUT An external output device has a condition that Remove any jammed paper and open and needs attention before printing can resume then close the top cover If necessary re seat DEVICE CONDITION The amber light on the stapler stacker is the output device blinking 65 X X OUTPUT Communication between the printer and the Turn the printer off Replace the stapler device has been broken The device could be stacker on the printer Turn the printer on DEVICE DISCONNECTED disconnected If the error does not clear record the message and contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 66 XX X OUTPUT The stapler stacker has failed The amber 1 Turn the printer off light on the stapler stacker is solid DEVICE FAILURE 2 Check the stapling bed for jammed paper or staples Verify that the stapler cartridge is intact 3 Check that nothing is obstructing the movement of the stapler stacker 4 Check that the output tray is properly installed 5 Turn the printer on 68 X PERMANENT A non volatile storage device is full Pressing 1 Press W to continue the Y button should clear the message STORAGE FULL Printing can continue but there may be 2 For 68 0 errors turn the printer off then unexpected behavior on For help press X Description 3 If a 68 0 error persists contact alternates with HP Support 0 for onboard NVRAM 68 X PERMANENT 4 For 68 1 errors use the HP Web 1 for removable disk flash or hard Jet
15. ENWW adding 140 259 enabling 272 managing 140 menu map description 51 printing 142 menus configure device 53 diagnostics 63 hierarchy 46 I O input output 60 information 51 paper handling 52 print quality 54 printing 53 resets 62 retrieve job 50 Stapler stacker 59 system setup 56 message types 183 messages critical 183 error 183 status 183 warming 183 mopier mode 137 multiple pages per sheet 115 122 N n up printing networks administrative tools 18 configuring 80 configuring with embedded Web server 148 default gateway 82 disabling DLC LLC 83 disabling IPX SPX 83 disabling protocols 82 IP address 80 software 16 subnet mask 81 TCP IP parameters 80 115 122 O order at supplies 74 OS 2 drivers 19 ENWW P pages per sheet paper custom sizes setting 115 document size selecting 114 first page 115 121 pages per sheet 115 122 paper handling 8 paper handling menu 52 paper orientation Stapler stacker 132 paper path test page printing 180 paper specifications 33 parallel configuration 85 passwords network 147 PCL drivers selecting 20 PCL font list 145 personality setting 72 PIN personal identification number private jobs 136 ports troubleshooting Macintosh 244 247 PostScript Printer Description PPD files troubleshooting 243 PPDs troubleshooting 243 preconfiguration 12 presets 121 print cartridge authentication 162 checking toner levels 163 genuine HP 162
16. Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams have markings according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product s life HP LaserJet printing supplies In many countries regions this product s printing supplies print cartridges fuser and transfer unit can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program An easy to use and free takeback program is available in over 30 countries regions Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information Since 1992 the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program has collected millions of used LaserJet print cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in the world s landfills The HP LaserJet print cartridges and supplies are collected and bulk shipped to our resource and recovery Environmental product stewardship program 297 partners who disassemble the cartridges After a thorough quality inspection selected parts are reclaimed for use in new cartridges Remaining materials are separated and converted into raw materials for use by other industries to make a variety of useful products e U S returns For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies HP encourages the use of bulk returns Simply bundle two or more cartr
17. Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Changing printer control panel configuration settings 65 o o N D 10 Press to highlight COLOR BLACK MIX Press v to select COLOR BLACK MIX Press a or v to select the desired option Press v to select the option Press Menu Tray behavior options Tray behavior allows seven user defined options USE REQUESTED TRAY Selecting EXCLUSIVELY ensures that the printer will not automatically select another tray when you indicate that a specific tray should be used Selecting FIRST allows the printer to pull from a second tray if the specified tray is empty or does not match the settings specified for the print job EXCLUSIVELY is the default setting MANUALLY FEED PROMPT If you select ALWAYS the default value the system always displays a prompt before pulling from Tray 1 multipurpose tray If you select UNLESS LOADED the system will only display the prompt if Tray 1 is empty PS DEFER MEDIA This setting affects how non HP PostScript drivers will behave with the device There is no need to change this setting if using the drivers supplied by HP If set to ENABLED non HP PostScript drivers will use the HP tray selection method as the HP drivers do If set to DISABLED some non HP PostScript drivers will use the PostScript tray selection method instead of the HP method SIZE TYPE PROMPT This option allows you to control whether or not the tray configuration message and corresponding prompt to ch
18. cccceccseeceeeeeeeeeees 129 Selecting the printer behavior at staples out cece cecccceececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeees 130 Printing to the stapler stacker operuit aa a E ia aaa E 130 Selecting the stapler in an application 20 2 0 cece ccc c cece ceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeesaeeeaaeees 130 Selecting the stapler at the Control panel cece ceccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeesseeessneeeas 131 Job OMS CU ices case Sia leech ee ee elt lt eee a ee EES 131 Paper orientation when a stapler stacker is installed cccccecceececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseetaeeeanes 132 Special Pining S LUAUOMS icaccosetec giao ace cone eeceatta ehoeets a a A 133 Printing adifferent first pageses e a tales Bawlden sve tine Sereda one neerstacw ides 133 Prining a DIANK DACKICOVEN terns ites tinsstineiineedtindeseleblava Suteiiasty auiiadedetuelens Sedehing tea wiiebal aus 133 Printing ON CUSTOM SIZE media cccccccceecccesecceseeseusecesececsececsseesegeceesecesseseneseusesenatenaaes 133 Stopping a print request 0 0 cece cee cceeecceeeeceeeeceeeceseeceseeceseeceseeeeseueeseeeeseegesseeeeseeeseeeees 134 Stopping the current print job from the printer control panel cccceee 134 Stopping the current print job from a software application cccccceeeee ees 134 J b storage features a ene ee ee ane ele eee eC ar ene ne ene ae nee ere ene ee 135 Proofing and holding a
19. www hp com support clj4700 Print quality troubleshooting tool The print quality troubleshooting tool helps you identify and troubleshoot print quality issues for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer The tool includes solutions for many print quality issues using standard images to provide a common diagnostic environment It is designed to provide intuitive step by step directions for printing troubleshooting pages that are used to isolate print quality problems and provide possible solutions To find the print quality troubleshooting tool go to the following URL http www hp com go printquality clj4700 252 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Calibrating the printer The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer automatically calibrates and cleans at various times to maintain the highest level of print quality The user might also request the printer to calibrate via the printer s control panel using QUICK CALIBRATE NOW or FULL CALIBRATE NOW located in the CALIBRATION and PRINT QUALITY menu QUICK CALIBRATE NOW is used for color tone calibration and takes about 65 seconds If color density or tone seems wrong Quick Calibration can be run Full Calibration includes the Quick Calibrate routines and adds Drum Phase Calibration and Color Plane Registration CPR This takes about 4 minutes and 20 seconds If color layers black magenta cyan and yellow on the printed page seem to be shifted from one another FULL CALIBRATE NOW should be run The HP Co
20. 0 13 mm 0 005 in thick to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in 1 Tray 2 and optional trays use custom sizes specifically for B5 ISO These trays do not support the range of custom sizes that can be used in Tray 1 Table 1 4 Automatic duplex printing two sided printing Automatic duplex printing Dimensions Weight or thickness Paper Standard sizes Range Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 60 g m 16 Ib bond to 120 g X 11 in m 32 Ib bond 34 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW Table 1 4 Automatic duplex printing two sided printing continued Automatic duplex printing Dimensions Weight or thickness Glossy paper A4 letter 13 x 8 5 in legal executive JIS B5 HP Color Laser Glossy Photo amp Imaging Paper A4 letter inkjet papers in this printer inkjet papers in this printer NOTE Do not use NOTE Do not use A4 210 x297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in 8 5 x 13 215 9 x 330 2 mm 8 5 x 13 in Legal 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in Executive 184 2 x 266 7 mm 7 25 x 10 5 in JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 17 x 10 12 in See above for standard sizes supported Standard sizes Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 x 11 in A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in Range 75 g m 20 Ib bond to 120 g m 32 Ib bond 120 g m 32 Ib bond Table 1 5 Stapler stacker Stapler stacker Dimensions Weight or thickness Capacity Stacking with offset 2 l E NOTE Media types paper an
21. PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU 284 Appendix C Service and Support ENWW Print cartridge limited warranty statement This HP Print Cartridge is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship This warranty does not apply to print cartridges that a have been refilled refurbished remanufactured or tampered with in any way b experience problems resulting from misuse improper storage or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or c exhibit wear from ordinary use To obtain warranty service please return the product to place of purchase with a written description of the problem and print samples or contact HP customer support At HP s option HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE THE WARR
22. Print cartridge authentication The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer automatically authenticates the print cartridges when the cartridges are inserted into the printer During authentication the printer will let you know if a cartridge is a genuine HP print cartridge lf the printer control panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and you believe you purchased an HP print cartridge call the HP fraud hotline To override a non HP print cartridge error message press the v button HP fraud hotline Call the HP fraud hotline 1 877 219 3183 toll free in North America when you install an HP print cartridge and the printer message says the cartridge is non HP HP will help determine if the product is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following e You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge e The cartridge does not look like it usually does for example the packaging differs from HP packaging 162 Chapter7 Maintenance ENWW ENWW Print cartridge storage Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it CAUTION To prevent damage to the print cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Print cartridge life expectancy The life of the print cartridge depends on usage patterns and the amount of toner that print jobs require An
23. Printer driver Help Windows Printer driver Help is separate from program Help The printer driver help provides explanations for the buttons checkboxes and drop down lists that are in the printer driver It also includes instructions for performing common printing tasks such as printing on both sides printing multiple pages on one sheet and printing the first page or covers on different paper Activate the printer driver Help screens in one of the following ways e Click the Help button e Press the F1 key on the computer keyboard e Click the question mark symbol in the upper right corner of the printer driver e Right click on any item in the driver and then click What s This Gaining access to the printer drivers Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from your computer Operating System To change the settings for all To change the print job default To change the configuration print jobs until the software settings for example turn on settings for example add a program is closed Print on Both Sides by default tray or enable disable Manual Duplexing Windows 98 and 1 On the File menu in the 1 Click Start click Settings 1 Click Start click Settings Windows Milennium software program click and then click Printers and then click Printers Me Print 2 Right click the HP Color 2 Right click the HP Color 2 Select the HP Color LaserJet 4700 icon and LaserJet 4700 icon and LaserJet 4700
24. Solution The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray The guides in the tray are not against the paper Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the media size for which the tray is configured Verify that the guides are touching the paper Automatic feed error Table 8 5 Media does not feed automatically Cause and solution Cause Solution Manual feed is selected in the software application The correct size media is not loaded The input tray is empty Media from a previous jam has not been completely removed The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray The guides in the tray are not against the paper Load Tray 1 with media or if the media is loaded press w Load the correct size media Load media into the input tray Open the printer and remove any media in the paper path Closely inspect the fuser area for jams See Paper jams Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the media size for which the tray is configured Verify that the rear and width media guides are touching the paper Tray 2 or optional tray feed error Table 8 6 Media does not feed from Tray 2 or optional trays Cause and solution Cause Solution Manual feed is selected in the software application The correct size media is not loaded The input tray is empty The correct media type for the input tray is not selected in
25. features for Job Storage standard on HP Color LaserJet 4700ph printer Small outline dual inline memory modules SODIMMs Flash memory slots for additional fonts and firmware upgrades Printer stand Stapler stacker standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph B NOTE Optional as an accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn and a HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn The stapler stacker can be installed only on printers that are equipped with the automatic duplexer Up to four additional 500 sheet paper feeders Trays 3 4 5 and 6 8 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW ENWW Table 1 1 Features continued Connectivity Supplies Enhanced input output EIO card slots for optional connectivity Network connection using an HP Jetdirect embedded print server is standard on HP Color LaserJet 4700n HP Color LaserJet 4700dn HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn and HP Color LaserJet 4700ph printers USB 2 0 connection HP Jetdirect embedded print server to enable network connectivity without requiring use of an EIO slot Standard bidirectional parallel cable interface IEEE 1284 C compliant Auxiliary connector Both USB and parallel connections are supported but cannot be used at the same time Supplies status page contains information on toner level page count and estimated pages remaining High capacity no shake cartridge with automatic toner seal removal feature Printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge i
26. 1 3 Tray 2 and optional Trays 3 through 6 media sizes Tray 2 and optional trays Dimensions Weight or thickness Capacity Paper standard sizes letter Range Range Maximum stack height 56 A4 legal executive JIS B5 mm 2 2 in A5 custom sizes 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in 60 g m 16 Ib bond to 120 g to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in m 32 Ib bond Equivalent to 530 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond Glossy paper letter A4 legal Range Range Maximum stack height 56 executive JIS B5 A5 mm 2 2 in 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in 75 g m 20 Ib bond to 120 g E NOTE Do not use to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in m 32 Ib bond inkjet papers in this printer HP Color Laser Glossy Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 120 g m 32 Ib bond Maximum stack height 56 Photo amp Imaging Paper x 11 in mm 2 2 in letter A4 A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 E NOTE Do not use in mi inkjet papers in this printer Transparencies letter A4 Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 Minimum Maximum stack height 56 suitable for use in laser X 11 in mm 2 2 in printers 0 13 mm 0 005 in thick A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in HP Tough Paper letter A4 Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 Maximum Maximum stack height 56 Xx 11 in mm 2 2 in 0 13 mm 0 005 in thick A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in Labels letter A4 and custom Range Maximum Maximum stack height 56 sizes suitable for use in laser mm 2 2 in printers 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in
27. 13 XX YY MULTIPLE There are multiple jams in the paper path 1 Press for detailed information about This includes the top cover area clearing the jam JAMS IN PAPER PATH 2 Press and gt to step through the For help press instructions 3 for more information see Clearing jams 4 Ifthe message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY The printer has received more data from the 1 Press to continue printing computer than fits in available memory For help press E NOTE A loss of data will occur alternates with 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 2 Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error in the future To continue press v 3 Adding memory to the printer may allow printing of more complex pages 186 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message 22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press v 22 EMBEDDED I O BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with To continue press v 22 PARALLEL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW For help press alternates with 22 PARALLEL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press v 22 USB I O BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press v 40 EIO X BAD TRANSMISSION To continue press v 40 EMBEDDED I O BAD TRANSMISSION alternates with To continue press v ENWW Description The EIO card in card slot X has overflowed its I O buffer during a busy state The embedded JetDirect print server has overflow
28. 5in to216 60 g m 16 Ib bond to 220 g custom sizes x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in m 60 Ib bond Equivalent to 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond Glossy paper letter A4 legal Range Range Maximum stack height 10 executive JIS B5 A5 mm 0 6 in 76 x 127 mm 3 x Sin to 216 75 g m 20 Ib bond to 220 g E NOTE Donotuse 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in m 60 Ib bond zi inkjet papers in this printer Transparencies letter A4 Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 Minimum 0 13 mm 0 005 in Maximum stack height 10 suitable for use in laser x 11 in thick mm 0 6 in printers A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in HP Tough paper letter A4 Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 0 13 mm 0 005 in thick Maximum stack height 10 x 11 in mm 0 6 in A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in HP Color Laser Glossy Photo Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 220 g m 60 Ib bond Maximum stack height 10 Paper letter A4 x 11 in mm 0 6 in E NOTE Do not use Aa 210x297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 inkjet papers in this in printer Envelopes Com 10 Range 20 envelopes Monarch C5 DL B5 60 g m 16 Ib bond to 90 g m 24 Ib bond Labels letter A4 legal Range Maximum 0 23 mm 0 009 in Maximum stack height 10 executive JIS B5 A5 thick mm 0 6 in 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in ENWW Print media specifications 33 Table 1 2 Tray 1 media sizes continued Tray 1 Dimensions Weight or thickness Capacity suitable for use in laser printers Table
29. CD ROM must be installed to take full advantage of the printer features lf you do not have access to a CD ROM drive you can download the printing system software from the Internet at http www hp com support clj4700 EA NOTE You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by requesting them from an HP authorized service or support provider For Linux support see http www hp com go linux For UNIX support see http Awww hp com go jetdirectunix_software You can download the latest software free of charge at http www hp com support clj4700 Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 and Windows XP When installing the printing software in a direct connect environment always install the software before connecting the parallel or USB cable If the parallel or USB cable was connected before the software installation see Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected Either a parallel or USB cable can be used for the direct connection However you cannot connect parallel and USB cables at the same time Use an IEEE 1284 compatible cable or a standard 2 meter USB cable Installing the printing system software 1 Close all software programs that are open or running 2 Insert the printer CD ROM into the CD ROM drive If
30. Change any settings that 2 Change the settings that clicking Utilities and then you want to on the various you want on the various double clicking Printer pop up menus pop up menus and then Setup Utility on the Presets pop up menu click Save as and 2 Click on the print queue type a name for the preset 3 On the Printers menu click These settings are saved in the Show Info Presets menu To use the new settings you must select the 4 Click the Installable saved preset option every time Options menu you open a program and print a ENWW Printer drivers for Macintosh computers 23 Software for Macintosh computers The HP installer provides PostScript Printer Description PPD files Printer Dialog Extensions PDEs and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers If both the printer and the Macintosh computer are connected to a network use the printer embedded Web server EWS to configure the printer For more information see Using the embedded Web server Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software The printing system software supports Mac OS 9 1 and 9 2 and Mac OS X v10 2 8 and v10 3 The printing system software includes the following components e PostScript Printer Description PPD files The PPDs in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers provide access to printer features An installation
31. Destinations tab click the add button and then type the e mail addresses mobile device numbers or Web site URLs to which you want the e mail alerts sent E NOTE If your printer supports e mail lists you can make alerts lists for specific events the same way that you added e mail addresses Click the Events tab and in the list define the events for which an e mail alert should be sent To test the alerts setup click the Server tab and then click Test A sample message is sent to the defined e mail addresses if the configuration is correct Click Apply Now Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW Print media specifications For optimum results use conventional 75 g m 20 Ib photocopy paper Verify that the paper is of good quality and is free of cuts nicks tears spots loose particles dust wrinkles curls or bent edges e To order supplies in the U S go to http www hp com go ljsupplies e Toorder supplies worldwide go to http Awww hp com ghp buyonline html e Toorder accessories go to http www hp com go accessories B NOTE Test any media particularly custom media before purchasing large quantities to ensure that it will perform satisfactorily Supported media weights and sizes Table 1 2 Tray 1 media sizes Tray 1 Dimensions Weight or thickness Capacity Paper and cardstock Range Range Maximum stack height 10 standard sizes letter A4 mm 0 6 in legal executive JIS B5 A5 76x127 mm 3 x
32. Do not attempt to remove the pages until the job is complete The printer is currently processing a job but is not yet picking pages When paper motion begins this message will be replaced by a message that indicates which tray the job is being printed from The printer is currently processing or printing collated copies The message indicates that copy X of Y total copies is currently being processed The printer is actively processing a job from the designated tray This message might be displayed during periods of heavy usage if the printer becomes overheated If this occurs the printer enters a mode in which it prints for one minute and pauses for one minute This cycle continues until the operating temperature stabilizes The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system but was unsuccessful because the file system is full No action necessary No action necessary Follow the instructions on the printed pages Follow the instructions on the printed pages No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary Do not grab paper as it temporarily comes into the output bin The message will disappear when the job is finished No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary Press w to see step by step information e To clear the message press the key e Ifthe message persists turn the printer off then on 202
33. E eaten steer 159 Advanced color options for text graphics and photographs cccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 159 Halftone options oe ciesciciewenacicnitaac ioe scetinidlocewiedemssadsipemecionnitdinneciacieaw nuns cautinsweneiesiedbostaanes 159 NGALI CIK VE 159 ROB GOOT arrr aa E ie eee 160 EdC CONTO esinte tne lees E E E EEE E N eal 160 7 Maintenance Managing print cartridges saieiciainssmruasinwsdmnssamadanwisuawccasnnnsaxndwadendawnspdmaasaidsedmiudaionswaiacsasedwnsanaanenwatanenesins 162 HFP pint CAI SS eisiaa E a Ea a ea 162 Non HP print cartridges senses ancssnxosiiinduinsesaimman cnc sdeucsda dec vanteials sinien vonndaleceseeuenmedanebeddrluachincwnanss 162 Print cartridge authentication ccc ccceccseecceseeceeeeceseeseseeseecesseeseeeseaeesaueeseeeeseeeenseesaseeenes 162 FAP UIE NONNE ceeiesate cs ioe siendee neem deet ces E E TE 162 Pint Canta Ge Storage sssrinds a EE A a aE AAA EA 163 Print cartridge life expectancy ccccccsecccssceceeseecceececcsueeeceuseecsuseeessegeeeseusesssageessaeeessegs 163 Checking the print Cartridge life ccccccseccceececeeeeeceseeceeeeeceeecsaeeeeeeessueessaesesseeesseeeess 163 Using the printer Control panel cccceccceceeeece eee eeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeeees 163 Using the embedded Web server cccsscccssecseseeceseeseeceseuseseuecseusecnseeenanes 163 Using HP Easy Printer Care Software ccccccccsecceseeee
34. E erey te ane One h mer art eee 52 Contgu ure device Men sisman a N a N S 53 PFINUNG Meniti a a a T A A 53 Pracgualky MenNUsdari a a a uke or atad 54 SYVS EM Setup MENU aari a a a ares a a aE 56 Spe A KE MOM a E 59 VO MENU ai E a a sos ga ne eae A 60 Resets MENU asat Sates readers EO E at canine 62 DIAGNOSTICS MenUnsssisiiseni na a a a a a a tisealinaaiuy 63 Changing printer control panel configuration settings cccccccecccseececeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeesaaeeeaaeeesaees 64 JOD SLOG MAN oon a E O mason lene seem ene A E ame euteeeneratonae 64 Setting the job storage limit cece ccccceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeseeeseeeeeaeesseeesees 64 JOO GTC umeo Ulysse A S ETE 64 Setting the job held timeout 2 00 0 cccceeeecceececeececeeceseceseeeseueeseuseeseeeeseeeeseas 64 SMON P addr gt S i E A 65 Showing the IP address odrea aaa aaa A aaRS 65 COlON NAGI MIX ersan e a a a ieee eae aa bacuaen eps 65 Setting the Color Dlack MIX cccccseecceseccceseeceusecceseeceeeeceueeeseueesseeeeseuseesaeeessgees 65 TRAV De MaVIOl 0 DUO S aici sauteate ent nates ies aiendia te Aatuauia eles tuent a aap asians 66 Setting the printer to use the requested tray ccccceccceccceeceaeeeceeeeaeeeeseeeseeeeens 66 Setting Manually feed prompt cccccsseccesseccseeceeseeceucecseeseaeesseeeeseeeeeeeeesaeees 67 Setting the printer default for PS defer media ccc ccccceccceeceseeeceeeeaeeeaeeetaues 67 Setting the
35. Four levels of edge control are available e Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on e Normal is the default trapping setting Trapping is at a medium level Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on e Light sets trapping at a minimal level Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on e Off turns off trapping adaptive halftoning and color REt Halftone options Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output You can select halftone settings for text graphics and photographs independently The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail e The Smooth option provides better results for large solid filled print areas It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations Choose this option when uniform and smooth area fills are top priority e _ The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail Choose this option when sharp edges and details are top priority E NOTE Some applications convert text or graphics to bitmap images In these cases setting the color options for Photographs also affects how text and graphics appear Neutral Grays The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors that are used in text graphics and photographs Managing printer color options on Window
36. If the error persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Press to continue If this error occurs the printer will continue to track the time and date using the processor clock until the printer is turned off Unless the error is corrected you will be prompted to reset the date and time whenever the printer is turned off then on 1 Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press and to step through the instructions For more information about clearing jams see Jams in the stapler stacker If the message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press and to step through the instructions 184 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW 13 XX YY JAM IN OUTPUT DEVICE alternates with For help press 13 XX YY JAM IN PAPER PATH For help press 13 XX YY JAM IN STAPLER For help press 13 XX YY JAM IN TRAY 1 Clear jam then press V 13 XX YY JAM IN TRAY X For help press ENWW Description Paper is jammed in an external paper handling device The amber light on the stacker stapler is blinking There is a jam in the paper path A staple is jammed in the stapler Check the stapler stacker for jammed staples Paper is jammed in Tray 1 A page is jammed in Tray 2 or in one or more of the optional trays Control panel mes
37. LaserJet 4700 Stapler Stacker Install Guide For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color LaserJet 4700 Formatter Install Guide For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color LaserJet 4700 Paper Feeder Install Guide For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color LaserJet 4700 Help Guide For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color LaserJet 4700 Roller Kit Install Guide For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color LaserJet 4700 Roadmap For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals ENWW Part numbers 281 282 AppendixB Supplies and accessories ENWW C Service and Support ENWW 283 Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP Color LaserJet 4700 4700n 4700dn 4700dtn and 4700ph One year limited warranty printer HP warrants to you the end user customer that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase for the period specified above If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will at its opti
38. ON and OFF Allows you to enable and disable sleep mode The default is ON Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Diagnostics menu ENWW The diagnostics menu allows you to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with the printer Menu item PRINT EVENT LOG SHOW EVENT LOG PQ TROUBLESHOOTING PRINT DIAGNOSTICS PAGE DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK Paper Path SENSOR TEST PAPER PATH TEST Description This item will print an event log that will display the last 50 entries in the printer s event log starting with the most recent This item displays the last 50 events on the control panel display starting with the most recent This item prints a series of 8 pages that include instructions pages for each color demo page and configuration page These pages can help isolate print quality problems This item allows you to print a page that can assist in diagnosing printer problems This item allows you to remove a print cartridge to help determine which cartridge is the source of a problem This item performs a test on each of the printer s sensors to determine if they are working correctly and displays the status of each sensor This item is useful for testing the paper handling features of the printer such as the configuration of the trays MANUAL SENSOR TEST This item performs tests to determine whether the paper path sensors are operating correctly MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2 This item performs tests to dete
39. Press Menu to enter MENUS RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted Press v to select RETRIEVE JOB Press to highlight your USER NAME Press v to select your USER NAME Press to highlight a JOB NAME D a RF V N Press v to select the JOB NAME PRINT is highlighted 7 Press v to select PRINT 8 Press a or v to select the number of copies 9 Press v to print the job ENWW Job storage features 135 Deleting stored jobs When you send a stored job the printer overwrites any previous jobs with the same user and job name If there is not a job already stored under the same user and job name and the printer needs additional space the printer may delete other stored jobs starting with the oldest The default number of jobs that can be stored is 32 You can change the number of jobs that can be stored from the control panel For more information about setting the job storage limit see Configure device menu A job can be deleted from the control panel from the embedded Web server or from HP Web Jetadmin To delete a job from the control panel use the following procedure 1 Press Menu to enter MENUS RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted Press v to select RETRIEVE JOB Press to highlight your USER NAME Press v to select your USER NAME Press to highlight a JOB NAME Press v to select the JOB NAME Press to highlight DELETE Press v to select DELETE FN Se SS Se hUmLh Press v to delete the job Private jobs This option allow
40. Problem solving ENWW Software application problems ENWW System selection through software Table 8 22 Unable to change system selections through software Cause and solution Cause Solution System software changes are locked out by the printer control Consult with your network administrator panel The software application does not support system changes See the software application documentation The correct printer driver is not loaded Load the correct printer driver For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers The correct application driver is not loaded Load the correct application driver Font selection from software Table 8 23 Unable to select a font from the software Cause and solution Cause Solution The font is not available to the software application See the software application documentation Color selection from software Table 8 24 Unable to select colors from the software Cause and solution Cause Solution The software application does not support color See the documentation for the software application Color mode is not selected in the software application or Select Color mode instead of grayscale or monochrome printer driver mode The correct printer driver is not loaded Load the correct printer driver Optional trays and duplexer recognition Table 8 25 Printer driver does not recognize the optional trays or the duplex
41. Specify a Location check box clear all other check boxes and then click Next 3 Type the letter for the root directory For example X where X is the letter of the root directory on the CD ROM drive Click Next Follow the instructions on the computer screen Click Finish when installation has completed Select a language and follow the instructions on the computer screen a ft a Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed If installation fails reinstall the software If this fails check the installation notes and readme files on the printer CD ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box or go to http www hp com support clj 4700 for help or more information Uninstalling the software This section explains how to uninstall the printing system software Printer software 15 Removing software from Windows operating systems Use the Uninstaller in the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Tools program group to select and remove any or all of the Windows HP printing system components 1 Click Start and then click Programs Point to HP Color LaserJet 4700 and then click Tools Click Uninstaller Click Next Select the HP printing system components you want to uninstall Click OK ee ES 6 Follow the instructions on the computer screen to complete the uninstallation Software for networks For a summary of available HP network installation and config
42. X v10 2 8 and v10 3 The Apple PostScript driver must be installed in order to use the PPD files Use the Apple PostScript driver that came with your Macintosh computer Software for Macintosh computers 25 To install the printing system software 1 Connect a USB cable between the USB port on the printer and the USB port on the computer Use a standard 2 meter 6 56 foot USB cable 2 Insert the printer CD into the CD ROM drive and run the installer The CD menu runs automatically If the CD menu does not run automatically double click the CD icon on the desktop 3 Double click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder 4 Follow the instructions on the computer screen 5 For Mac OS 9 1 and 9 2 a Onthe computer hard drive open Applications open Utilities and then open Print Center b Double click Printer USB and then click OK c Next to USB Printer Selection click Change d Select the printer and then click OK e Next to Postscript Printer Description PPD File click Auto Setup and then click Create f On the Printing menu click Set Default Printer For Mac OS X v10 2 8 and v10 3 USB queues are created automatically when the printer is attached to the computer However the queue will use a generic PPD if the installer has not been run before the USB cable is connected To change the queue PPD open the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility select the correct printer queue and then click Show Info
43. accepted a request to printan No action necessary internal page but the current job must finish please wait printing before the internal page will print Resend The firmware upgrade was not completed Attempt upgrade again successfully upgrade Restoring The printer is restoring external accessory No action necessary settings in response to a user request accessory 206 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action Restoring Restoring factory settings RESTRICTED FROM PRINTING IN COLOR alternates with Ready Rotating lt COLOR gt motor To exit press Stop Rotating motor To exit press Stop SANITIZING DISK X COMPLETE DO NOT POWER OFF Setting saved SIZE MISMATCH TRAY XX SIZE For help press alternates with Ready SLEEP MODE ON STACKER BIN FULL STACKER TOP COVER OPEN STACKER TOP COVER OPEN STAPLER DOOR OPEN STAPLER DOOR OPEN The printer is restoring settings This message is displayed during the execution of a restore action such as RESTORE COLOR VALUES The printer is restoring factory settings The printer is set to COLOR IF ALLOWED and you or your software program are not authorized to print in color A component test is in progress the component selected is the lt color gt cartridge motor The printer is executing a component test and the component selected is a motor A storage device is being sanitized Do no
44. adjustment to adjust the Color or Color Map and Halftoning options for a print job Halftone options Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output You can select halftone settings independently for text graphics and photographs The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail e The Smooth option provides better results for large solid filled print areas It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations Select this option when uniform and smooth area fills are the top priority e The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail Select this option when sharp edges and details are the top priority E NOTE Some software programs convert text or graphics to raster images In these cases the Photographs settings also control text and graphics Neutral Grays The Neutral Grays setting determines the method that the printer uses to create gray colors in text graphics and photographs Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting e Black Only generates neutral colors grays and black by using only black toner This guarantees neutral colors that do not have a color cast e 4 Color generates neutral colors grays and black by combining all four toner colors This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to non neutral colors and it produces the darkest
45. are met e Print the Print Quality Troubleshooting Pages see Print qualit troubleshooting and follow the diagnostic procedure listed on the first page to help isolate the defect to a particular component Vertical lines Repetitive defects e Print the Print Quality e Make sure that the Troubleshooting Pages see Print qualit troubleshooting and follow the diagnostic procedure listed on the first page to help isolate the defect to a particular component operation and location requirements of the printer are met Print the Print Quality Troubleshooting Pages see Print qualit troubleshooting and follow the diagnostic procedure listed on the first page to help isolate the defect to a particular component Print quality troubleshooting 255 Color fade in all colors Color fade in one color e Make sure that the operation and location requirements of the printer are met e Make sure that the operation and location requirements of the printer are met e Calibrate the printer e Calibrate the printer e Print the Print Quality Troubleshooting Pages see Print qualit troubleshooting and follow the diagnostic procedure listed on the first page to help isolate the defect to a particular component Fingerprints and media Loose toner dents Make sure that the operation and location requirements of the printer are met e Make sure to use
46. be printing only black and white print jobs 3 PostScript PS Printer Description files PPDs Additional drivers The following drivers are not included on the CD ROM but are available from the Internet e OS 2 PCL printer driver e O8S 2 PS printer driver e UNIX model scripts e Linux drivers e HP OpenVMS drivers E NOTE The OS 2 drivers are available from IBM Printer drivers 19 You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by requesting them from an HP authorized service or support provider For Linux support see www hp com go linux For UNIX support see www hp com go jetdirectunix_software Select the correct printer driver Select a printer driver based on the operating system that you are using and the way that you use the product See the printer driver Help for the features that are available For information about gaining access to the printer driver Help see Printer driver Help e The PCL 6 printer driver can provide the best overall performance and access to your printer features e The PCL 5 printer driver is recommended for general office monochrome and color printing e Use the PostScript PS driver if you are printing primarily from PostScript based programs such as Adobe PhotoShop and CorelDRAW for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs or for PS flash font support EA NOTE The product automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages
47. card at an angle B NOTE The first flash memory slot marked Firmware Slot is reserved for firmware only Slots 2 and 3 should be used for all other solutions 7 Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot and then slide the board back into the printer ENWW Installing a hard disk memory and fonts 271 8 Reconnect the power cable and interface cables and turn the printer on Enabling memory If you installed a memory DIMM set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory To enable memory for Windows 98 and Me 1 On the Start menu point to Settings and click Printers 2 Right click the printer and select Properties 3 On the Configure tab click More 4 Inthe Total Memory field type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed 5 Click OK To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP 1 On the Start menu point to Settings and click Printers or Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the printer and select Properties 3 On the Device Settings tab click Printer Memory in the Installable Options section 4 Select the total amount of memory that is now installed 5 Click OK 2 2 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards ENWW Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card You can install an HP Jetdirect print server in an open EIO slot To install an HP Jetdirect print server card 1 Turn the printer off 2 ENWW Install
48. column titled To change the configuration settings 2 Inthe area for configuring additional output devices select the stapler stacker and then click OK 3 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 4 Click the Output tab 5 6 In the Staple box select the stapling option that you want to use for the print job Click OK The product is now set to use the stapling option that you selected Setting the color options Options on the Color tab control how colors are interpreted and printed from software programs You can choose either Automatic or Manual color options For more information see Managing printer color options on Windows computers e Select Automatic to optimize the color and halftone used for each element in a document such as text graphics and photographs The Automatic setting provides additional color options for applications and operating systems that support color management systems This setting is recommended for printing all color documents e Select Manual to manually adjust the color and halftone modes for text graphics and photographs If you are using a PCL driver you can adjust the RGB data If you are using the PS driver you can adjust RGB or CMYK data 118 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW ENWW To set the color options 1 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 2 Select the Color tab 3 Inthe Color Options area select the option that
49. complete list of available types 52 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Configure device menu The CONFIGURE DEVICE menu allows you to change the default printing settings adjust the print quality change the system configuration and I O options and reset the default settings Printing menu These settings affect only jobs without identified properties Most jobs identify all of the properties and override the values set from this menu This menu can also be used to set default media size and type Menu item Values Description COPIES DEFAULT PAPER SIZE DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE DUPLEX DUPLEX BINDING OVERRIDE A4 LETTER MANUAL FEED COURIER FONT WIDE A4 PRINT PS ERRORS PRINT PDF ERRORS 1 32000 A list of available sizes appears UNIT OF MEASURE X DIMENSION Y DIMENSION OFF ON LONG EDGE SHORT EDGE NO YES OFF ON REGULAR DARK ON FORM LENGTH ORIENTATION FONT SOURCE FONT NUMBER Allows you to set the default number of copies The default number is 1 Allows you to set the default media size Allows you to set the default size for any job without dimensions The default unit of measurement is MILLIMETER Allows you to enable or disable the duplex function on models with duplexing capability The default is OFF Allows you to specify which edge of the sheet is to be bound when printing duplex jobs The default is LONG EDGE Allows you to set the
50. control panel Use the control panel to access printer features not supported by the printer driver or software application Use the control panel to configure trays for paper size and type Getting started basics Enter the menus and activate any selection by pressing the Menu button Use the Up or Down arrows aw to navigate through the menus In addition to menu navigation the Up and Down arrows can increase and decrease numerical value selections Hold down the Up or Down arrows to scroll faster The Back button 9 allows you to move back in menu selections as well as select numerical values when configuring the printer Exit all menus by pressing Menu If no key is pressed for 60 seconds the printer will return to the Ready state A lock symbol next to a menu item means a PIN number is needed to use that item Typically this number is obtained from your network administrator Control panel menus 45 Menu hierarchy The following tables list the hierarchies of each menu To enter the menus Press Menu to enter MENUS Press a or to navigate the listings Press v to select the appropriate option MENUS RETRIEVE JOB INFORMATION PAPER HANDLING CONFIGURE DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS SERVICE Retrieve job menu See Retrieve job menu for more information RETRIEVE JOB PRINT STORED JOB LIST USER NAME ALL PRIVATE JOBS PRINT COPIES DELETE Information menu See Information menu for more inf
51. control panel changes the default setting to STAPLE It is possible that all print jobs might be stapled However settings that are changed in the printer driver override settings that are changed at the control panel NOTE When configuring to STAPLES 1 EDGE the OFFSET menu is set to DISABLED Jobs cannot be both stapled and offset Job offset When the job offset feature is enabled the stapler stacker offsets each print job for easy identification Letter A4 JIS B5 215 9 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 in and legal size paper can be offset The job offset option is configured only from the printer control panel It cannot be activated through the printer driver Once this feature is configured all subsequent print jobs are offset NOTE A print job can be either stapled or offset If job offset is configured at the control panel but not in the printer driver the job is offset If offset is configured at the control panel but the printer driver is configured to staple the job the printed document is stapled and the offset feature is overridden Configuring job offset at the control panel 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu to enter the menus Press v to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE and then press v Press to highlight STAPLER STACKER and then press v Press to highlight OFFSET and then press v Press to highlight ENABLED and then press v Using the stapler stacker 131 Paper orientation when a stapler stacker is installed When
52. control panel functions such as checking supplies status viewing messages or changing tray configuration For more information see Using the embedded Web server 40 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Control panel buttons ENWW Use the buttons on the control panel to perform printer functions and to navigate and respond to menus and messages in the display Button name Function Y Select Makes selections and resumes printing after recovery errors 4 Up arrow Navigates menus and text and increases or decreases the values of numerical items in the display wv Down arrow Back exit arrow Navigates backward in nested menus or quits menus or help Menu Accesses and exits the menus Stop Pauses the current job and provides options to resume printing or to cancel the current job Help Provides animated graphics and detailed information on printer messages or menus Control panel buttons 41 Interpreting control panel indicator lights 1 Ready 2 Data 3 Attention Indicator On Off Flashing Ready Printer is online able to Printer is offline or is turned Printer is attempting to stop accept and process data off printing and go offline green Data Processed data is presentin Printer is not processing or Printer is processing and the printer but more data is receiving data receiving data green needed to complete the job Attention A critical error has occurred No conditions exist that An error has o
53. deme dscanedcenseshovundenai E E E E E 38 DISD a a E E E E E 38 Accessing the control panel from a computer ccc ceccceceeeeceeeeseeeeaeeeeceeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeeanees 40 COA ON AS TT OS oeren a N E E E I E EE 41 Interpreting control panel indicator lights cccccccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeessueeseueeesueesseaes 42 Interpreting stapler stacker indicator light codes ccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeseseesseneees 43 Contool pane TS WS sniene eiae a a a n E NEE aE 45 Getting started DASICS sesser iarna E a E 45 Menu MGa CNY ta cece ante a E ttn E EE aera dae gd eaten E E 46 To enter the menus non nsenneensennsrsesrrseressrrsrrersrosrrrsrrosrersrrrnrernrosrrrrroerersrrrerrrsresrnernreeren 46 Reny JOD MENU ie acerca ra E A E 46 iHtormaton MENU ates ccctesiidccyeetdeieassnadddeustatescadbietauasuasiennuasteetdsanendsacpameiainsetessnensdarodsiuuedearsemantdins 46 Paper Nanding MENU ssrssssssrisrsen n a aa a ea Ea 47 Configure device MENU ccccsececceseecceseccceucecsaueeeceueeseauseeccuseessageecsaueeesaueessgeessageessaeeeses 47 E elege silesdar c ALN MAR TEA E E A anbuk eves E E seas mamiembodsed 49 Retrieve Job UN grapes ahr sap lance olen ne lectin eaa ae Eaa a EEA EENT EEE 50 ENWW ENWW TOPIIATION SE CUP EE E stakes E sated E EE eG Se noe oe ote hese ena adn bout es E REEI EE 51 cl 912 mate ale late Meni laemeeeee taeee eee rae arsenite ented
54. e Setting the color options e Using the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box e Using the Services tab E NOTE Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control panel settings Software program settings generally override printer driver settings Creating and using quick sets Use quick sets to save the current driver settings for reuse For example you can save the page orientation print on both sides and paper source settings in a quick set Quick sets are available on most printer driver tabs You can save up to 25 Print Task Quick Sets EA NOTE The printer driver might report that 25 Print Task Quick Sets have been defined when fewer than 25 are visible Some predefined Print Task Quick Sets which do not apply to your product might be included and are counted in the total number To create a quick set 1 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 2 Select the print settings that you want to use 3 Inthe Print Task Quick Sets box type a name for the selected settings for example Quarterly Report or My Project Status 4 Click Save Using features in the printer driver 113 To use quick sets 1 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 2 Select the quick set that you want to use from the Print Task Quick Sets drop down list 3 Click OK The product is now set to print according to the saved settings in the quick set E NOTE To resto
55. easyprintercare Embedded Web server This printer is equipped with an embedded Web server which allows access to information about printer and network activities A Web server provides an environment in which web programs may run much in the same way that an operating system such as Windows provides an environment for programs to run on your computer The output from these programs can then be displayed by a Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator When a Web server is embedded that means it resides on a hardware device such as a printer or in firmware rather than as software that is loaded on a network server The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the printer that anyone can access with a network connected computer or a standard Web browser There is no special software to install or configure For more information about the HP embedded Web server see the Embedded Web Server User Guide You can find this guide on the CD ROM included with the printer Printer software 17 18 Features The HP embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network card status and manage printing functions from your computer With the HP embedded Web server you can do the following e View printer status information e Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones e View and change tray configurations e View and change the printer control panel m
56. enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE 5 Press v to select PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE The message Printing SUPPLIES STATUS appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the supplies status page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the supplies status page B NOTE Ifyou are using non HP supplies the supplies status page will not show the remaining life for those supplies For more information see Non HP print cartridges Usage page The usage page lists a page count for each size of media that has passed through the printer This page count includes the number of pages that were printed on one side the number that were printed on two sides duplexed and totals of the two printing methods for each media size It also lists the average percentage of page coverage for each color 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT USAGE PAGE 5 Press v to select PRINT USAGE PAGE The message Printing USAGE PAGE appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the usage page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the usage page Printer information pages 143 Demo page A demo page is a representation of a color photograph that demonstrates print quality 1 Press Menu to enter the MENU
57. example to emulate another HP color LaserJet printer Color profiles can be downloaded from http www hp com ENWW Using color 153 Color matching The process of matching printer output color to your computer screen is quite complex because printers and computer monitors use different methods of producing color Monitors display colors by light pixels using an RGB red green blue color process but printers print colors using a CMYK cyan magenta yellow and black process Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor These factors include e Print media e Printer colorants inks or toners for example e Printing process inkjet press or laser technology for example e Overhead lighting e Personal differences in perception of color e Software applications e Printer drivers e Computer operating system e Monitors e Video cards and drivers e Operating environment humidity for example Keep the above factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors For most users the best method for matching colors on your screen to your printer is to print SRGB colors PANTONE color matching PANTONE has multiple color matching systems PANTONE Matching System is very popular and uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints See hitp www hp com support clj4700 for details on how to use PANTONE Matching System with th
58. for the control panel display The allowable range of values is 1 through 10 The default for this feature is 5 To change or set the display brightness use the following steps Setting the display brightness 1 SS Pa eS Bp Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS Press v to select DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS Press a or to highlight the desired value Press v to accept the selection Press Menu Changing printer control panel configuration settings 71 Personality This printer features automatic personality printer language switching AUTO is the default value AUTO configures the printer to automatically detect the type of print job and configure its personality to accommodate that job PCL configures the printer to use Printer Control Language PDF configures the printer to print PDF files PS configures the printer to use PostScript emulation Setting the personality 1 eS a FS e p r Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight PERSONALITY Press v to select PERSONALITY Press a or w to select the appropriate personality AUTO PCL PDF or PS Press
59. gt TYPE N represents the number of the tray you are configuring Press v to select TRAY lt N gt TYPE 98 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW ENWW 6 T Press or a to highlight the correct paper type Press v to select the correct paper type A Setting saved message appears and then the current type and size settings are displayed Configuring Tray 2 and optional trays for a custom paper size The printer automatically detects many sizes of paper but you can also configure trays for custom paper sizes You must specify the following parameters Unit of measure millimeters or inches X dimension the width of the page as it feeds into the printer Y dimension the length of the page as it feeds into the printer Media width guides Media length guides Page width X dimension Page length Y dimension Use the following procedure to configure a tray for a custom size Once a custom size is set for a tray it will be retained until the media length guides are reset Setting a custom size in Tray 2 or an optional tray 1 2 3 4 5 6 Open the tray and place the media face up in the tray Set the media length guides to the appropriate non standard position and close the tray When the tray configuration message appears press v Press a to change ANY CUSTOM to CUSTOM Press v to select CUSTOM Press or to highlight the correct unit either millimeters or inches Configuring input trays 99 7 Pres
60. important to return the printer back to its original settings once the job has printed See Configuring input trays A CAUTION In general do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification recommended for this printer Doing so can cause misfeeds paper jams reduced print quality and excessive mechanical wear HP LaserJet Tough paper When printing on HP LaserJet Tough paper use the following guidelines Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper only by the edges Oils from your fingers deposited on HP LaserJet Tough paper can cause print quality problems Use only HP LaserJet Tough paper with this printer HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results In either the software application or the driver select TOUGH PAPER as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for HP LaserJet Tough paper Preprinted forms and letterhead Observe the following guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat resistant inks that will not melt vaporize or release undesirable emissions when subjected to the printer s fusing temperature of approximately 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second Inks must be non flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers Printing on special media 111 e Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage e Before loading preprinted paper such as f
61. information 1 Turn the printer off then on 2 Ifthe message persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 Turn the printer off then on 2 Press and to step through the instructions 3 If the message persists contact HP Support at http Awww hp com support clj4700 188 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message 50 X FUSER ERROR To continue turn off then on 51 2Y PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 51 2Y PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 52 XY PRINTER ERROR alternates with To continue turn off then on 53 XY ZZ CHECK RAM DIMM SLOT X 54 01 PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 54 X PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on ENWW Description The error might be due to an inadequate power supply inadequate line voltage or a problem with the fuser A fuser error has occurred Either a laser beam detects an error or a laser error has occured The values of Y are Y Description 0 Black 1 Cyan 2 Magenta 3 Yellow A printer error has occurred A memory error has occurred Printing cannot continue The humidity environmental sensor is abnormal Printing cannot continue There is a sensor malfunction Values of X are 01 Humidity sensor Recommended action Turn the printer off then on i Turn the printer off then on If the problem persists contact HP Support
62. intervals for supplies and the control panel messages that prompt when to replace each item Usage conditions and print patterns can cause results to vary Item Printer message Page count Approximate time period Black cartridges REPLACE BLACK 11 000 pages 3 months CARTRIDGE Color cartridges REPLACE lt COLOR gt 10 000 pages 2 7 months CARTRIDGE Image transfer kit REPLACE TRANSFER KIT 120 000 pages 40 months Image fuser kit REPLACE FUSER KIT 150 000 pages 50 months 1 Approximate average A4 letter size page count based on 5 coverage of individual colors 2 Approximate life is based on 3 000 pages per month 3 Approximate life is estimated at 150 000 pages when printing in 4 page intermittent mode You can use the embedded Web server to order supplies For more information see Using the embedded Web server Replacing the stapler cartridge The stapler cartridge contains 5 000 staples Replace the entire cartridge when it is empty Replace the stapler cartridge if the printer control panel display prompts you with a STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES message at this point the stapler cartridge has 20 to 50 staples left or a REPLACE 168 Chapter7 Maintenance ENWW STAPLER CARTRIDGE message If the stapler runs out of staples and the stapler stacker is configured to CONTINUE jobs continue to print to the stapler stacker but they are not stapled If the stapler stacker is configured to stop printing stops until a new stapler cartridge is loa
63. into the printer first e For all other trays load the letterhead paper with the front side down and the top edge at the back of the tray A CAUTION Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib bond Jamming might result Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers Open the Layout pop up menu Next to Two Sided Printing select either Long Edge Binding or Short Edge Binding Click Print To print on both sides manually 1 6 Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job If you are loading special paper such as letterhead load it in one of the following ways e For tray 1 load the letterhead paper with the front side up and the bottom edge feeding into the printer first e Forall other trays load the letterhead paper with the front side down and the top edge at the back of the tray A CAUTION Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib bond Jamming might result Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers On the Finishing pop up menu select the Manual Duplex option E NOTE Ifthe Manual Duplex option is not enabled select Manually Print on 2nd Side Click Print Go to the printer Remove any blank paper that is in tray 1 Insert the printed stack with the printed side up and the bottom edge feeding into the printer first You must print the second side from tray 1 Follow the instructions in the pop up window that
64. its useful life The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages indicated Estimated pages remaining is based upon the historical page coverage of this printer Printing will continue until a supply needs to be replaced The fuser is near the end of its life The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages indicated Printing will continue until a supply needs to be replaced More than one supply item is low Printing will continue until a supply needs to be replaced If you believe you purchased an HP cartridge please call the HP fraud hotline 1 87 7 21 9 3183 toll free in North America A CAUTION Any printer repair d required as a result of using non HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty Press to view help for the message Obtain the part number for the print cartridge indicated Order a print cartridge E NOTE Supplies ordering 2 3 information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information Press to view help for the message Obtain the part number for the fuser kit Order the fuser kit EA NOTE Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information Press Menu to access the menus Press or to highlight INFORMATION and then press v Press or to highlight SUPPL
65. life expectancy 163 managing 162 non HP 162 replacing 164 storing 163 Print Document On 114 print media colored paper 110 envelopes 110 for color printing 152 glossy paper 109 115 122 heavy paper 110 labels 110 letterhead 111 media to avoid 94 preprinted forms 111 printing from Tray 1 100 recycled paper 112 selecting 94 specifications 33 supported sizes 33 supported types 33 supported weights 33 Tough paper 111 transparencies 109 print quality diagnosing problems 254 print quality defects 254 repetitive defect ruler 253 print quality menu 54 print server card installing 273 print servers configuring 147 Printer 8 printer accessories 8 connectivity 9 drivers 19 22 fonts 8 maintenance 161 managing 141 performance 7 personalities 7 printer basics 1 printer components locating 10 printer configurations 4 64 printer driver Services tab 119 printer features walk around 10 printer information access 2 printer information pages troubleshooting 180 printer personalities 72 printer settings configure 53 printer software 12 printer supplies 9 Index 309 printing booklets 128 canceling 134 special media 109 special situations 133 printing envelopes 101 printing from optional trays 102 printing from Tray 2 102 printing menu 53 printing tasks 91 private jobs deleting 137 printing 136 problem solving 1 7 product stewardship 297 PS drivers selecting 20 Q quick sets 113 R RAM random access memor
66. of FCC rules Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for any direct indirect incidental consequential or other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information 296 AppendixE Regulatory information ENWW Environmental product stewardship program ENWW Protecting the environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas O3 Power consumption Power usage drops significantly while in Sleep mode which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this printer This product qualifies for ENERGY STAR Version 3 0 which is a voluntary program to encourage the development of energy efficient office products ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR is a U S registered service mark of the U S Environmental Protection Agency As an ENERGY STAR partner Hewlett Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency For more information see http www energystar gov Paper use This product s optional automatic duplex feature two sided printing see Two sided duplex printing and N up printing multiple pages printed on one page capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources
67. page data while the printer creates an image of the page parallel cable A type of computer cable often used to connect printers directly to a computer rather than to a network parallel port A connection point for a device connected with a parallel cable PCL An acronym for Printer Control Language PDF Anacronym for Portable Document Format The native file format for Adobe Systems Incorporated Acrobat PDF is the file format for representing documents in a manner that is independent of the original application software hardware and operating system used to create those documents peripheral An auxiliary device such as a printer modem or storage system that works in conjunction with a computer personality Distinctive features or characteristics of a printer or printer language pixel Abbreviation for picture element which is the smallest unit of area in an image displayed on a screen PJL An acronym for Printer Job Language PostScript A trademarked page description language PPD An acronym for PostScript Printer Description Print Task Quick Set A feature of the printer driver that allows you to save the current printer driver settings for example page orientation two sided printing and paper sources for reuse printer driver Software program that allows a computer to access printer features 304 Glossary ENWW RAM An acronym for random access memory a type of computer memory used to store data that may change
68. product number Q7495A The HP Color LaserJet 4700ph includes the features of the 4700dtn two additional 500 sheet paper feeders Trays 5 and 6 a high capacity stapler stacker a printer stand a hard disk and an additional 256 MB of memory EA NOTE 544 MB of SDRAM 512 MB of DDR plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board and an additional DIMM slot This printer has two 200 pin small outline dual inline memory module SODIMM slots that accept 128 or 256 MB of RAM each 6 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW Printer features ENWW This printer combines the quality and reliability of Hewlett Packard printing with the new features and standard capabilities listed below For more information on printer features see the Hewlett Packard Web site at http www hp com support clj4700 Table 1 1 Features Performance e Prints up to 31 pages per minute ppm for letter sized paper and up to 30 ppm for A4 sized paper e First page prints in 10 seconds or less from the Ready prompt The printer can be set to wake from sleep mode at a specific time each day Memory e 160 MB of memory for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and 4700n 288 MB for the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn and HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn and 544 MB for the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph E NOTE Memory specification HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers use 200 pin small outline dual inline memory modules SODIMM that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM e Two open EI
69. state after printing the menu map You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference The content of the menu map varies depending on the options currently installed in the printer Many of these values can be overridden from the printer driver or software application For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values see Menu hierarchy Configuration page Use the configuration page to view current printer settings to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories such as memory DIMMs paper trays and printer languages 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 142 Chapter5 Managing the printer ENWW ENWW 4 Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION 5 Press v to select PRINT CONFIGURATION The message Printing CONFIGURATION appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the configuration page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page B NOTE If the printer is configured with an HP Jetdirect print server or a stapler stacker an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices Supplies status page The supplies status page illustrates the remaining life for the following printer supplies e Print cartridges all colors e Transfer unit e Fuser To print the supplies status page 1 Press Menu to
70. system is Mac OS X v10 1 v10 2 8 or v10 3 e Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software from Apple Hardware troubleshooting e Check that the printer is turned on e Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly e Check that you are using the appropriate high speed USB cable e Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing power from the chain Disconnect all of the devices from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host computer e Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are connected in a row on the chain Disconnect all of the devices from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host computer ENWW Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems 247 Table 8 27 Problems with Mac OS X continued When connected with a USB cable the printer does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected Cause Solution Z NOTE The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub 248 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Color printing problems ENWW Printout color error Table 8 28 Printing black instead of color Cause and solution Cause Solution Color mode is not selected in the software application or printer driver The correct printer driver is not selected in your software application No color appears on the configuration page The control panel setting for COLOR SUPPLY OUT is set t
71. tab This tab allows the network administrator to control network related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP based network This tab will not appear if the printer is directly connected to a computer or if the printer is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server Click Help on the Networking tab pages for more information on network settings Other links This section contains links that connect you to the Internet to order supplies or obtain product support You must have Internet access to use any of these links If you use a dial up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server you must connect before you can visit these Web sites Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it e HP Instant Support Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions This service analyzes your printer error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information specific to your printer e Order Supplies Click this link to connect to the HP Web site and order genuine HP supplies such as print cartridges and paper e Product Support Connects to the support site for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer Then you can search for help regarding general topics 148 Chapter5 Managing the printer ENWW Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software ENWW The HP Easy Printer Care Software is an application that
72. the printer control panel Media from a previous jam has not been completely removed None of the optional trays appear as input tray options An optional tray is incorrectly installed Load Tray 1 with media or if the media is loaded press v Load the correct size media Load media in the input tray From the printer control panel select the correct media type for the input tray Open the printer and remove any media in the paper path Closely inspect the fuser area for jams See Paper jams The optional trays only display as available if they are installed Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed Verify that the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional trays For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is installed If not verify that the tray is correctly attached to the printer Problem solving Table 8 6 Media does not feed from Tray 2 or optional trays continued Cause and solution Cause Solution The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the media size for which the tray is configured The guides in the tray are not against the paper Verify that the guides are touching the paper Special media feed error Table 8 7 Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed Cause an
73. the alerts should be forwarded Software Information location HP Web Jetadmin See HP Web Jetadmin for general information about HP Web Jetadmin See the HP Web Jetadmin Help system for details on alerts and how to set them up Embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for general information about the embedded Web server See the embedded Web server Help system for details on alerts and how to set them up ENWW Configuring alerts 175 176 Chapter7 Maintenance ENWW 8 Problem solving This chapter describes what to do if problems arise with your printer The following topics are covered e Basic troubleshooting checklist e Factors affecting printer performance e Troubleshooting information pages e Control panel message types e Control panel messages e Paper jams e Common causes of paper jams e Clearing jams e Media handling problems e Printer response problems e Printer control panel problems e Incorrect printer output e Software application problems e Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems e Color printing problems e Print quality troubleshooting ENWW 177 Basic troubleshooting checklist If you are experiencing problems with the printer this checklist can help identify the cause of the problem e Is the printer connected to power e Is the printer in the Ready state e Are all necessary cables connected e Are any messages displayed on the control panel e Wasa genuine HP supply in
74. the pages or covers that you want to print on different paper To print front or back covers you must also select Add Blank or Preprinted Cover Select the appropriate paper type or source for the other pages of the print job The product is now set to print the document on the paper that you selected EA NOTE The paper size must be the same for all pages of the print job Printing a blank first page To print a blank first page 1 2 3 4 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers On the Paper or Paper Quality tab click Use Different Paper Covers In the list box click Front Cover Click Add Blank or Preprinted Cover Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature is available in some drivers and provides a cost effective way to print draft pages Using features in the printer driver 115 To print more than one page on a sheet of paper look for a layout or pages per sheet option in the driver This is sometimes called 2 up 4 up or n up printing To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper 1 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 2 Click the Finishing tab 3 Inthe section for Document Options select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet 1 2 4 6 9 or 16 4 Ifthe number of pages is greater than 1 select the correct opti
75. the welcome screen does not open start it by using the following procedure e On the Start menu click Run e Type the following X setup where X is the letter of the CD ROM drive e Click OK When prompted click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen Click Finish when the installation has completed You might need to restart the computer gt oe p Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed Printer software 13 If installation fails reinstall the software If this fails check the installation notes and readme files on the printer CD ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box or go to http www hp com support clj4700 for help or more information Installing Windows printing system software for networks The software on the printer CD ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network For network installation on other operating systems go to hitp www hp com support clj4700 The HP Jetdirect embedded print server in the HP Color LaserJet 4700n HP Color LaserJet 4700dn printer or HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn printer includes a 10 100 Base TX network port For other available HP Jetdirect print servers see Supplies and accessories or go to http www hp com support clj4700 The installer does not support printer installation or printer object creation on Novell servers It supports only direct mode network installatio
76. to print a PCL job with the printer From the printer control panel select the correct printer configured for PostScript Emulation personality and then resend the print job You are attempting to print a PostScript job with the printer From the printer control panel select the correct printer configured for PCL personality and then resend the print job Partial printout Table 8 21 Partial printout Cause and solution Cause Solution A memory error message appears on the printer control panel 1 Free up printer memory by deleting unneeded downloaded fonts style sheets and macros from printer memory or 2 Add more memory to the printer The file you are printing contains errors Check the software application verify that the file does not contain errors To do so 1 Print another file that you know is error free from within the same application or 2 Print the file from another application Guidelines for printing with different fonts e The 80 internal fonts are available in PostScript Emulation PS and PCL mode e To conserve printer memory download only those fonts that are needed e f you require several downloaded fonts consider installing additional printer memory Some software applications automatically download fonts at the beginning of each print job It might be possible to configure those applications to download only soft fonts that are not already resident in the printer 240 Chapter8
77. v to set the personality Press Menu Clearable warnings You can determine the display time of control panel clearable warnings with this option by selecting ON or JOB The default value is JOB ON displays clearable warnings until you press v JOB displays clearable warnings until the end of the job in which it was generated Setting the clearable warnings 1 ea SS YS N Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight CLEARABLE WARNINGS Press v to select CLEARABLE WARNINGS 72 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW 8 Press a or to select the appropriate setting 9 Press v to set the selection 10 Press Menu Auto continue You can determine printer behavior when the system generates an Auto Continuable error ON is the default setting e ON displays an error message for ten seconds before automatically continuing to print e OFF pauses printing any time the printer displays an error message and until you press v Setting auto continue 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight AUTO CONTINUE Press v to select AUTO CONTINUE Press a or v to select the appropriate setting o Fo Ss Mm Aa P w Press v to s
78. vary depending on paper type and the software application used For more details on how to use the color samples go to http www hp com support clj4700 Use the following procedure to print color samples at the printer using the control panel 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight INFORMATION Press v to select INFORMATION Press to highlight PRINT CMYK SAMPLES or PRINT RGB SAMPLES Press v to select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES or PRINT RGB SAMPLES Color matching 155 Managing printer color options on Windows computers Setting color options to Automatic typically produces the best possible print quality for the most common printing requirements However for some documents setting the color options manually can enhance the way the document appears Examples of these documents include marketing brochures that contain many images or documents that are printed on a media type that is not listed in the printer driver For Windows you can print in grayscale or change the color options by using settings found on the Color tab in the printer driver For more information about how to access the printer drivers see Gaining access to the printer drivers Print in grayscale Select the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver to print a document in black and white RGB Color Color Themes Five values are available for the RGB Color setting e Select Default SRGB for most printing needs This
79. you can use for the following tasks e View color usage information e Check the printer status e Check supplies status e Setup alerts e Gain access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools You can use the HP Easy Printer Care Software when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network You must perform a complete software installation to use the HP Easy Printer Care Software For more information see http www hp com go easyprintercare E NOTE You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Easy Printer Care Software However if you click a Web based link you must have Internet access to go to the site associated with the link Supported operating systems The HP Easy Printer Care Software is supported for Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows 2003 server To use the HP Easy Printer Care Software Use one of the following methods to open HP Easy Printer Care Software e Onthe Start menu select Programs select HP Easy Printer Care and then select Start HP Easy Printer Care e Inthe Windows system tray taskbar in the lower righthand corner of the desktop double click the HP Easy Printer Care Software icon e Double click the desktop icon HP Easy Printer Care Software sections The HP Easy Printer Care Software contains the sections described in the table below Section Description Overview tab e Device list Shows the printers that you can select Cont
80. you click Print Print Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW e Printer Properties dialog box printer driver The printer driver opens when you click Properties in the Print dialog box Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not override settings available anywhere else e Default printer settings The default printer settings determine settings used in all print jobs unless settings are changed in the Page Setup Print or Printer Properties dialog boxes as described above There are two ways to change the default printer settings 1 Click Start Settings Printers and then right click the printer icon and click Properties 2 Click Start Control Panel and then select the Printers folder right click the printer icon and click Properties For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers A CAUTION To avoid affecting print jobs of other users make printer setup changes through the software application or the printer driver whenever possible Printer setup changes made through the control panel become default settings for subsequent jobs Changes made through an application or the printer driver affect only that specific job ENWW Controlling print jobs 93 Selecting print media Y
81. 0 sheet tray face down with the top edge of the page towards you EA NOTE Loading paper for duplexing is different than loading for one sided printing Two sided duplex printing 125 Control panel settings for automatic two sided printing Many software applications allow you to change two sided print settings If your software application or printer driver does not allow you to adjust two sided printing settings you can adjust these settings through the control panel The factory default setting is OFF A CAUTION Do not use two sided printing when printing on labels Serious damage could result To enable or disable two sided printing from the printer control panel EA NOTE Changing settings for two sided printing through the printer control panel affects all print jobs Whenever possible change settings for two sided printing through your software application or printer driver NOTE Any changes made in the printer driver will override settings made using the printer control panel 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select PRINTING Press to highlight DUPLEX Press v to select DUPLEX S O O O a e Press a or w to select ON to enable two sided printing or OFF to disable automatic two sided printing Press v to set the value 9 Press Menu 10 Select two sided printing from your software application or printer driver if possibl
82. 100 sheets Q6610A HP Color Laser Brochure Paper letter 250 sheets Q6616A HP Superior 160 Glossy Laser Paper A4 150 sheets C2934A HP Color Laser Transparencies letter 50 sheets C2936A HP Color Laser Transparencies A4 50 sheets Reference materials Q7491 90953 HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide Q7491 90943 Q7499 90901 For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color LaserJet 4700 Getting Started Install Guide For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color LaserJet 4700 500 sheet Input Tray Install Guide 280 AppendixB Supplies and accessories ENWW Part Part number Type size Q7501 90902 Q7504 90902 Q7502 90902 Q7003 90903 Q7491 90951 5851 2562 Q7491 90941 Q7491 90009 Q7491 90949 For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color LaserJet 4700 Printer Stand Install Guide For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color LaserJet 4700 ETB Kit Install Guide For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color LaserJet 4700 110V 220V Fuser Install Guide For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj4700 When connected select Manuals HP Color
83. 215 Clearing a jam in the top cover area cccccccsececseeecceseeceeesseeesseuseneueeseeeseas 216 Clearing other jans insiens a a a a e aa 218 Jame IM tne stapler stac ke inire a a a aa 220 OIG aS oa a ET 227 Wedla nanaling Probes ara sorts ais ccciaiecticce vier eiaiane een cetsaeattadldioanetaaersniadiadearke tiger aad eee ema 230 IVINS SCC TS auseneen aiaa SEST 230 Stapler Cis 6 lt eee ee eee ee ee ene ec eee ee eee ae 230 INCOME CL page SZE oneni a a a a a aa 231 NCOMEC ETA Van a a E sageee des eraeheuns sens sae aene eteaee aceaaadte 231 Automate TESCO SION a ican teeaicen ieee casera a a a N 232 Tray 2 or optional tray feed error cccccceecccescecceeccceeeeceeeeceeuceecsueeseeueessueessuseeseesessneeens 232 Special Media Teed SION csc heceaewes is Facies at Ses oe el ches eae aa cde E R nade 233 Envelope DNAUNG OTOT brutais a a o Ei 233 CUTOUT CU IY senian eee a T a E een vente ves 234 DOPIEXINO EMON radien E E E a o E r Ea a E a 234 Pinertesponsa PrODICMS maneran a R a a TEE 235 Control panel display is blank ccc ceccccececsececeeeececeeseeseaeeseeeeseeeeseaeesaueeseeeesaeessueesaaes 235 Printer does NotpiNEeerincsnreeana a a a a a cdes 235 Printer MOL TECCIVING data ernorm ennn a aa a a ea a 236 Printer selection egies ase eee a a E E amet at al 23 Printer controlpanel Problem incase ot Stones artes a aA A een AN 238 Control DANG SCN Gy recresen N a see acstenesaaseccaees 238 Select
84. 4 Printing tasks ENWW 3 For Windows on the Finishing tab click Print on Both Sides 4 Click OK The product is now ready to print on both sides of the paper To print on both sides manually 1 Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job If you are loading special paper such as letterhead load it in one of the following ways e For tray 1 load the letterhead paper with the front side up bottom edge first e For all other trays load letterhead paper with front side down and the top edge at the back of the tray CAUTION Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib bond Jamming could result Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers On the Finishing tab select Print on Both Sides manually Click OK Send the print job to the product ee Pp Go to the product Remove any blank paper that is in tray 1 Insert the printed stack with the printed side up and the bottom edge feeding into the product first You must print the second side from tray 1 Follow the instructions in the pop up window that appears before feeding the output stack back into Tray 1 for printing the second half pa A prompt might appear on the control panel display that instructs you to press a button to continue Layout options for printing on both sides The four duplex orientation options are shown below To select option 1 or 4 select Flip Pages Up in the printer driver
85. 52 0 0 ODUON enter tn r o E E A E EEEE E eer eee 152 E E gt E ee E E PE ecb EE I A E E EPE E T T E TN 152 Printing in four colors COM YK iendre aA A 153 CMYK ink set emulation PostScript only ccccecccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeees 153 Color matching ee eee e ene EE ee E a A ia Eia 154 PANTONE color matching s wicsciniiedcisccicantieiedncoauens deuce sadinemsictintinosthannteletiaindaveeniledenacadeuieedetuwcdue 154 X ENWW Sample book color matching cccceeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeas 154 Printing color samples nnsnnoennsnnesnernssnsernnsrornrsrrorersrersrsrrrsrrerersresrrrnrrsnrerersresrrnrrenererenne 155 Managing printer color options on Windows computers ccceeccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeceeeeseeeseeesaeeeaeeeees 156 FMC OA SCAO a peie epe ee a EEE pE E EE ERES 156 RGB Color Color Themes sive sicaice ws ccterocwsdereadave suwecasmertweceeeieere vice taweceauveieyeecsiweladducdsveuntaes 156 Automatic or manual Color adjustment cc cccceecceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseeeeseeeseeeseneeaeeeaes 156 Manualcolgr Opos asriar e ae a E E EE 157 Restricting color printing sida sivssncasasaneshtensdediansnansiniandandatinedsandiuelila nne Uaasabebadewseadansawagtioanneiudapiaxs 158 Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers ccceccceecceeeeeeeeseeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaes 159 PAINT ONO aS Ay aa E
86. ANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU ENWW Print cartridge limited warranty statement 285 Fuser and transfer unit limited warranty statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer provides a low life indicator on the control panel This warranty does not apply to products that a have been refurbished remanufactured or tampered with in any way b experience problems resulting from misuse improper storage or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or c exhibit wear from ordinary use To obtain warranty service please return the product to place of purchase with a written description of the problem or contact HP customer support At HP s option HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUE
87. B NOTE Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control panel settings Software program settings generally override printer driver settings Creating and using presets in Mac OS X Use presets to save the current driver settings for reuse For example you can save the page orientation print on both sides feature and paper type settings in a preset To create a preset 1 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 2 Select the print settings that you want to use 3 Inthe Presets box click Save As and type a name for the preset for example Quarterly Report or My Project Status 4 Click OK To use presets 1 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 2 Inthe Presets menu select the preset that you want to use Ex NOTE To restore printer driver default settings select Standard from the Presets pop up menu Printing a cover page If you want to you can print a separate cover page for your document that includes a message such as Confidential Using features in the Macintosh printer driver 121 To print a cover page 1 2 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers On the Cover Page or Paper Quality pop up menu select whether to print the cover page Before Document or After Document If you are using Mac OS X in the Cover Page Type pop up menu select the message that you want to print on the
88. Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW ENWW 6 Double click Printer AppleTalk 7 Next to AppleTalk Printer Selection click Change 8 Select the printer click Auto Setup and then click Create EA NOTE The icon on the desktop looks generic All of the print panels appear in the print dialog box with each software program To install printer drivers for Mac OS X v10 2 8 and v10 3 1 Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port 2 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive The CD menu runs automatically If the CD menu does not run automatically double click the CD icon on the desktop 3 Double click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder 4 Follow the instructions on the computer screen 5 On the computer hard drive open Applications open Utilities and then open Print Center or Printer Setup Utility E NOTE Ifyou are using Mac OS X v10 3 then the Printer Setup Utility has replaced the Print Center Click Add Printer Select Rendezvous as the connection type Select your printer from the list a Click Add Printer 10 Close the Print Center or the Printer Setup Utility by clicking the close button in the upper left corner Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections USB EA NOTE Macintosh computers do not support parallel port connections This section explains how to install the printing system software for Mac OS 9 1 and 9 2 and Mac OS
89. Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action To clear press v alternates with Ready RAM DISK DEVICE B NOTE This will also delete any files saved in RAM A device failure has occurred on the specified 1 FAILURE To clear press v alternates with Ready RAM DISK FILE drive The printer received a PUJL file system 1 To clear the message press the Y key 2 Ifthe message persists turn the printer off then on 3 If the message still persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 To clear the message press the key OPERATION FAILED To clear press v alternates with Ready RAM DISK IS command that attempted to perform an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory Printing may continue 2 Ifthe message persists turn the printer off then on 3 Ifthe message reappears there may be a problem with the software application 1 To enable writing to the RAM disk turn WRITE PROTECTED To clear press v alternates with Ready The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it off write protection using HP Web Jetadmin software 2 To clear the message press the key 3 If the message persists turn the printer off then on The printer is online and ready for data No Ready The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels o
90. E SUPPLIES setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP AT LOW This message is generated when a print cartridge or print cartridges has reached the e Close the top cover e Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information e Replace the stapler cartridge For more information see Replacing the stapler cartridge e Install a stapler cartridge 1 Press x to access the SUPPLIES STATUS menu 2 Press and to highlight the specific supply that has a problem 3 Press to view help for the supply 4 Press and to step through the instructions 5 Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information Press to see step by step information 1 Press to access the SUPPLIES STATUS menu 2 Press and gt to highlight the specific supply that has a problem 3 Press to view help for the supply 4 Press and gt to step through the instructions 5 Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information Press to see step by step information Control panel messages 205 Control panel message Description Recommended action Using black only out condition and the printer is set to AUTOCONTINUE BLACK alternates with lt Current statu
91. Factory settings support automatic switching between the parallel port and one or more network connections on the printer If you are experiencing problems see Network configuration ENWW Parallel configuration 85 USB configuration This printer supports a USB 2 0 connection The USB port is located on the back of the printer as shown in the figure below You must use an A to B type USB cable 1 USB connector 2 USB port This printer also includes a third party accessory ACC port that uses USB host protocol shown in the figure below 1 ACC accessory port 86 Chapter 3 I O configuration ENWW Auxiliary connection configuration This printer Supports an auxiliary connection for paper handling input devices The port is located on the back of the printer as shown in the figure below Figure 3 3 Auxiliary connection configuration 1 Auxiliary connector ENWW Auxiliary connection configuration 87 HP Jetdirect print servers 88 The HP Jetdirect print servers facilitate network management by allowing you to connect a printer directly to your network at any location They support multiple network protocols and operating systems HP Jetdirect print servers also support the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP which provides network managers with remote printer management and troubleshooting through HP Web Jetadmin software The HP Color LaserJet 4700n 4700dn 4700dtn and 4700ph print
92. Gian msn Gunn Ey NOTE If memory problems occur when you are printing complex graphics you can make more memory available by removing downloaded fonts style sheets and macros from printer memory Reducing the complexity of a print job from within an application can help avoid memory problems 140 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW gt Managing the printer This chapter describes how to manage the printer The following topics are covered e Printer information pages e Using the embedded Web server n Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software ENWW 141 Printer information pages From the printer control panel you can print pages that give details about the printer and its current configuration The procedures for printing the following information pages are described here e Menu map e Configuration page e Supplies status page e Usage page e Demo page e Print RGB samples e Print CMYK samples e File directory e PCL or PS font list e Event log Menu map To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the control panel print a control panel menu map 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 If PRINT MENU MAP is not highlighted press a or until it is highlighted 5 Press v to select PRINT MENU MAP The message Printing MENU MAP appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the menu map The printer returns to the Ready
93. HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series Printer User Guide invent Copyright and License 2005 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical errors or omissions contained herein Part number Q7491 90953 Edition 1 11 2005 Trademark Credits Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Corel and CorelDRAW are trademarks or registered trademarks of Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited Energy Star and the Energy Star logo are U S registered marks of the United States Environmental Protection Agency Microsoft is a U S registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation Netscape Navigator is a U S trademark of Netscape Communications PANTONE Colors generated may not match PANTONE identified standards Consult current PANTONE Publications for accurate color PANTONE and other Pantone Inc trademarks are the property of Pantone Inc Pantone Inc 2000 PostScript is a trademark of A
94. HP Web Jetadmin checking toner level 163 using to configure alerts 175 I O input output menu 60 I O configuration network configuration 80 IBM OS 2 drivers 19 IEEE 802 11b standard 89 information menu 51 information pages CMYK samples page 144 configuration page 142 demo page 144 eventlog 145 file directory 145 menu map 142 PCL font list 145 PS font list 145 RGB samples 144 supplies status page 143 usage page 143 input trays capacities 33 configuring 52 66 97 internal clock 148 IP address displaying 65 Macintosh troubleshooting 243 246 J jam recovery setting 75 jams common causes 212 configuring alerts 175 envelopes 233 locations 210 recovery 210 Stapler stacker 220 stapler stacker duplex path 221 staples 227 top cover area 216 Jetdirect print servers configuring 147 job held timeout 64 job offset 129 131 job storage 7 135 job storage limit 64 L language changing 76 embedded Web server 147 selecting 76 lights 42 43 links information 2 Linux drivers 19 M Macintosh background printing 244 drivers accessing 21 22 drivers troubleshooting 245 fonts troubleshooting 244 problems troubleshooting 243 USB card troubleshooting 244 247 maintenance agreements 287 media automatic sensing 95 custom sizes setting 115 document size selecting 114 firs page 121 first page 115 loading Tray 2 and optional trays 103 105 107 maximum size 8 pages per sheet 115 122 type 8 weight 8 memory
95. HP color print cartridge lasts an average of 10 000 pages and an HP black print cartridge lasts an average of 11 000 pages when printing on letter or A4 size paper at 5 coverage for each print cartridge Usage conditions and print patterns could cause actual results to vary At any time you can verify the life expectancy by checking the toner level as described below Checking the print cartridge life You can check the print cartridge life using the printer control panel the embedded Web server printer software HP Easy Printer Care Software or HP Web Jetadmin software Using the printer control panel 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE 5 Press v to print the supplies status page Using the embedded Web server 1 In your browser enter the IP address for the printer home page This takes you to the printer status page See Using the embedded Web server 2 On the left side of the screen click Supplies Status This takes you to the supplies status page which provides print cartridge information Using HP Easy Printer Care Software In the Overview tab in the Supplies Status section click Supplies Details to open the supplies status page For more information on HP Easy Printer Care software go to http www hp com go easyprintercare Using HP Web Jetadmin In HP Web Jetadmin select the printer d
96. IES STATUS and then press v Press or to highlight a supply that needs to be ordered Press to access help for the supply Obtain a part number from help Order the supply Repeat the previous steps as necessary for each supply that needs to be ordered Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information 200 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action ORDER TRANSFER KIT LESS THAN XXX PAGES For help press alternates with Ready Paused To return to Ready press RESUME key Performing PRINT STOP TEST Performing upgrade Performing PAPER PATH TEST Please wait PRINTING STOPPED To continue press v Printing CMYK Samples Printing CONFIGURATION Printing DEMO PAGE Printing DIAGNOSTICS PAGE Printing ENGINE TEST Printing Event Log Printing FILE DIRECTORY The transfer unit is near end of life Printing can continue The printer is paused and there are no error messages pending at the display The I O continues receiving data until memory is full The printer is performing a print stop test A firmware upgrade is in process The printer is performing a paper path test The printer is in the process of clearing data This message is displayed when a Print Stop Test is run and time expires This message displays whil
97. IMEOUT PARALLEL INPUT EMBEDDED JETDIRECT EIO X JETDIRECT 48 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Where X 1 or 2 RESETS RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS SLEEP MODE Diagnostics menu See Diagnostics menu for more information DIAGNOSTICS PRINT EVENT LOG SHOW EVENT LOG PQ TROUBLESHOOTING PRINT DIAGNOSTICS PAGE DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK PAPER PATH SENSORS PAPER PATH TEST MANUAL SENSOR TEST MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2 COMPONENT TEST PRINT STOP TEST COLOR BAND TEST ENWW Menu hierarchy 49 Retrieve job menu The retrieve job menu allows you to view listings of all stored jobs Menu item Description PRINT STORED JOB LIST Prints a page that lists all jobs stored on the printer Each person who has jobs stored on the printer is listed The number in parentheses indicates how many jobs that person has stored NO STORED JOBS If there are no stored jobs this message appears in place of the list USER NAME Each user who has stored jobs is listed by name Select the appropriate user name to see a list of stored jobs ALL PRIVATE JOBS This message is displayed if a user has stored jobs that require a PIN PRINT When printing a private job the user is prompted to enter a PIN COPIES The number of copies of the job to be printed The default is 1 DELETE When deleting a private job the user is prompted to enter a PIN 50 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Information menu Use the information menu to access and print specific pr
98. NAME Press to highlight a JOB NAME Press v to select the JOB NAME PRINT is highlighted Press v to select PRINT Press a or to select the first digit of the PIN Press v to select the digit The number changes to an asterisk Repeat steps 8 and 9 to enter the remaining three digits of the PIN Press v when finished entering the PIN Press a or w to select the number of copies Press v to print the job Deleting a private job A private job can be deleted from the printer control panel You can delete a job without printing it or it will be automatically deleted after it is printed i 2 3 4 9 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 Press Menu to enter MENUS RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted Press v to select RETRIEVE JOB Press to highlight your USER NAME Press v to select your USER NAME Press to highlight a JOB NAME Press v to select the JOB NAME Press to highlight DELETE Press v to select DELETE Press a or to select the first digit of the PIN Press v to select the digit The number changes to an asterisk Repeat steps 9 and 10 to enter the remaining three digits of the PIN Press v when finished entering the PIN Press v to delete the job Mopier mode When Mopier mode is enabled the printer produces multiple collated copies from a single print job Multiple original printing mopying increases printer performance and reduces network traffic by sending the job to the printer once then sto
99. NCED FUNCTIONS is ON TCP IP Select whether the TCP IP protocol stack is enabled or disabled You can set several parameters Select the TCP IP CONFIGURE METHOD to configure the EIO card For the MANUAL option select the values for IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK LOCAL GATEWAY and DEFAULT GATEWAY IPX SPX Select whether the IPX SPX protocol stack in Novell NetWare networks for example is enabled or disabled APPLETALK Enable or disable an AppleTalk network 60 Chapter 2 Control panel Menu item Values Description EIO X The values may vary Possible values may include Where X 1 or 2 TCP IP IPX SPX APPLETALK DLC LLC SECURE WEB RESET SECURITY LINK SPEED DLC LLC Select whether the DLC LLC protocol stack is enabled or disabled SECURE WEB Specify whether the embedded Web server accepts communications by using only secure HTTP HTTPS or by using both HTTP and HTTPS DIAGNOSTICS Provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP IP network connection problems RESET SECURITY Specifies whether the current security settings on the print server are saved or reset to factory defaults LINK SPEED Selects the network link speed and communication mode for the 10 100T print server To ensure proper communication the Jetdirect settings must match those of the network TCP IP Select whether the TCP IP protocol stack is enabled or disabled You can set several parameters Select the TCP I
100. NNECTION alternates with For help press Description The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory The printer received a PUJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system but was unsuccessful because the file system is full The device has not been initialized This message is displayed when a paper path sensor test or a paper path test is run The alphabetical value indicates which sensor is being checked An attempt has been made to modify a menu item while the control panel security mechanism is enabled by the printer administrator The message will disappear shortly and the printer will return to Ready state The duplexer is not connected properly and must be reinserted before printing can continue Recommended action 3 Turn the printer back on 4 Ifthe message still persists replace the Flash DIMM 1 To enable writing to the Flash Memory turn off write protection using HP Web Jetadmin 2 To clear the message press the key 3 If the message persists turn the printer off then on 1 To clear the message press the key 2 Ifthe message persists turn the printer off then on 3 Ifthe message reappears there may be a problem with the software application 1 U
101. NTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU 286 AppendixC Service and Support ENWW HP maintenance agreements HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty Support services may vary by area Check with your local HP dealer to determine the services available to you On site service agreements To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs HP has on site service agreements with three response times Priority on site service This agreement provides 4 hour service response to your site for calls made during normal HP business hours Next day on site service This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request Extended coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP s designated service zones are available on most on site agreements for additional charges Weekly volume on site service This agreement provides scheduled weekly on site visits for organizations with many HP products This agreement is designated for sites using 25 or more workstation products including printers plotters compute
102. NUAL SETTINGS 80 Chapter 3 I O configuration ENWW ENWW 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Press to highlight MANUAL Press to highlight IP ADDRESS Press v to select IP ADDRESS EA NOTE The first of three sets of numbers is highlighted If a number is not highlighted a highlighted empty underscore appears Press a or to increase or decrease the number for configuring the IP address Press v to move to the next set of numbers Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the correct IP address is entered Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state Setting the subnet mask 1 Sn ee eS SY hUrS ee A P p 14 15 16 17 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight I O Press v to select I O Press to highlight the JETDIRECT menu Press v to select the JETDIRECT menu Press to highlight the TCP IP menu Press v to select TCP IP Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS Press v to select MANUAL SETTINGS Press to highlight SUBNET MASK Press v to select SUBNET MASK Ex NOTE The first of three sets of numbers is highlighted Press a or to increase or decrease the number for configuring the subnet mask Press v to move to the next set of numbers Repeat steps 14 and 15 until the correct subnet mask is entered Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state Network configuration 81 Setting the default ga
103. NWW e Ability to quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address color capability and model name Ability to easily organize peripherals into logical groups with virtual office maps for easy navigation e Ability to manage and configure multiple printers at once To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and to see the latest list of supported host systems visit HP Customer Care Online at http www hp com go webjetadmin UNIX The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer installation utility for HP UX and Solaris networks It is available for download from HP Customer Care Online at http www hp com go jetdirectunix_software Utilities The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer is equipped with several utilities which make it easy to monitor and manage the printer on a network HP Easy Printer Care Software The HP Easy Printer Care Software is a software program that you can use for the following tasks e Viewing color usage information e Checking the printer status e Checking the supplies status e Setting up alerts e Viewing printer documentation e Gaining access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools You can view the HP Easy Printer Care Software when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network Perform a complete software installation in order to use the HP Easy Printer Care Software For more information see http www hp com go
104. O slots e Can be expanded to 544 MB 512 MB of DDR memory plus 32 MB of memory on the formatter board e Optional hard disk drive can be added via an EIO slot an internal hard disk drive is included with the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph printer User interface e Four line graphic display on control panel e Enhanced Help with animated graphics e Embedded Web server to access support and order supplies network connected printers e HP Easy Printer Care Software a Web based status and troubleshooting tool Supported printer personalities e HP PCL 6 e HP PCL 5c e PostScript 3 emulation e Portable document format PDF Job storage features e Full job storage features e Proof and hold e Private jobs e Quick copy e Mopier mode e Job storage e Personal identification number PIN printing e Fonts and forms Printer features 7 Table 1 1 Features continued Environmental features o Fonts Paper handling J Accessories e Sleep mode setting High content of recyclable components and materials Energy Star compliant 80 internal fonts available for both PCL and PostScript emulation 80 printer matching screen fonts in TrueType format available with the software solution Supports forms and fonts on the disk using HP Web Jetadmin Prints on media from 77 mm x 127 mm 3 inches x 5 inches up to 216 mm x 356 mm 8 5 inches x 14 inches legal siz
105. OD i sescerrsstensciesrony seiciex otedoee shdinusninatasitslenamen sys a a aa a aaa ai 135 Printing Stood JODS sesnomiroie irainen a e EE EE E EAEE 135 Deleting stored jobs ccccesccsseccsseceeeeceeecaseeeseceaeeseusecsecsseeseeeeseeesasseneessaess 136 PV UU JODS a E E A 136 Pinang a private FOO ise sree arctiewts asian since aN e eae Said a EEan 136 Deleting a private JOD cccccccececssccsscecesecesecesecseeeseeeeseeeagsesseeseesecseesseesages 137 Mo pier MOUE sreniiresarnni i Sa E a EAE OEE iE AE a E EEEE EE aE Eea 137 Storing a print job ws saserncte sa testeretessic cite once sgetec ato teice atte as re esse sib vidncneataeande Go guseemeedcdeneaeniene 138 Q ick copying a JOD eee ene ent eee nn ene ee ee mene ee meen Se ene 138 Managing MEMO seera sete eet aseeuicnta sustains E e e E E E E EE EEE 140 5 Managing the printer Printer information pages sdiccsavteroiennssstarcuaan noctorceounocsanndduedendatocuandennsdesaaatupasioceenedenaaee canes lewaoceadeancuens 142 NONU sea cysteines tis E E EAE cepa E bane EE EE EN 142 Configuration page sigessccjedepnioas eetsecsunostsgserutandiideGtnsadeBendnstaadehducteesenis tase leeenasiecadeeaiawanene 142 Supplies status page icc iie tie peciet actieiesscievinssdodiewnsacguttnencdiendacbieaeisnd deledniedsiahaviontaeisyclndticeiantimatencuncemadetiinans 143 WIS AGS ACC aeaee E E E E ounecsselatoeiiadeiedessssasetalsee custo 143 ECO DAC orie n EEE E E E T E R 144 Print CMYK
106. P CONFIGURE METHOD to configure the ElO card For the MANUAL option select the values for IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK LOCAL GATEWAY and DEFAULT GATEWAY IPX SPX Select whether the IPX SPX protocol stack in Novell NetWare networks for example is enabled or disabled APPLETALK Enable or disable an AppleTalk network DLC LLC Select whether the DLC LLC protocol stack is enabled or disabled SECURE WEB Specify whether the embedded Web server accepts communications by using only secure HTTP HTTPS or by using both HTTP and HTTPS DIAGNOSTICS Provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP IP network connection problems RESET SECURITY Specifies whether the current security settings on the print server are saved or reset to factory defaults LINK SPEED Selects the network link speed and communication mode for the 10 100T print server To ensure proper ENWW Configure device menu 61 62 Menu item Values Description communication the Jetdirect settings must match those of the network Resets menu The resets menu allows you to reset factory settings disable and enable sleep mode and update the printer after new supplies are installed Menu item Values Description RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS None Allows you to clear the page buffer remove all perishable personality data reset the printing environment and return all default settings to factory defaults SLEEP MODE Values are
107. PRINT QUALITY Press v to select PRINT QUALITY Press to highlight CREATE CLEANING PAGE ea Ss oS hUr Press v to select CREATE CLEANING PAGE EA NOTE The printer prints a cleaning page with a pattern The PROCESS CLEANING PAGE option is not available for these printers until the cleaning page has been created 8 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 9 Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE 10 Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE 11 Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY 12 Press v to select PRINT QUALITY 172 Chapter7 Maintenance ENWW ENWW 13 Press to highlight PROCESS CLEANING PAGE 14 Press v to select PROCESS CLEANING PAGE Cleaning the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn and HP Color LaserJet 4700ph printers at the control panel 1 a 2 2 Pe SY Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press w to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY Press v to select PRINT QUALITY Press w to highlight PROCESS CLEANING PAGE Press v to select PROCESS CLEANING PAGE A page with a pattern prints Setting auto cleaning The AUTO CLEANING menu option allows you to turn auto cleaning on or off When auto cleaning is turned on the printer prints a cleaning page when the page count reaches the value set in the cleaning interval If auto cleaning is set to Off the cleaning interval is not shown The default value for auto cleaning is Off 1 Pt ea
108. Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight I O Press v to select I O Press to highlight the JETDIRECT menu Press v to select JETDIRECT Press to highlight APPLETALK Press v to select APPLETALK Press to highlight ENABLE Press v to select ENABLE Press to highlight ON or OFF Press v to select ON or OFF Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state Chapter 3 I O configuration ENWW Parallel configuration The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer supports network and parallel connections at the same time A parallel connection is made by connecting the printer to the computer using a bidirectional parallel cable IEEE 1284 C compliant with a C connector plugged into the printer parallel port The cable can be a maximum of 10 meters 30 feet long When used to describe a parallel interface the term bidirectional indicates that the printer is able to both receive data from the computer and send data to the computer through the parallel port maran ZZZZZ 717 C C O 1 C connector 2 Parallel port EA NOTE To use the enhanced capabilities of the bidirectional parallel interface such as bidirectional communication between the computer and printer faster transfer of data and automatic configuration of printer drivers ensure that the most recent printer driver is installed For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers NOTE
109. Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector 5 Select the printer that you want to configure and then click Utility To open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X v10 3 1 In the Dock click the Printer Setup Utility icon E NOTE Ifthe Printer Setup Utility icon does not appear in the Dock open the Finder click Applications click Utilities and then double click Printer Setup Utility 2 Select the printer that you want to configure and then click Utility Printing a cleaning page Print a cleaning page if the printer is not printing jobs at the expected quality level 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Color Cleaning 3 Click Print Cleaning Page to print the cleaning page Printing a configuration page Print a configuration page to view the printer settings For more information about the configuration page see Configuration page 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Configuration Page 3 Click Print Configuration Page to print the configuration page ENWW Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 27 Viewing supplies status View the status of the printer supplies such as print cartridges imaging drum or print media from a computer 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Supplies Status 3 Click the Supplies tab to view the status of various replaceable supplies and click the Media ta
110. S 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT DEMO 5 Press v to select PRINT DEMO The message Printing DEMO PAGE appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the demo page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the demo page Print CMYK samples Use the PRINT CMYK SAMPLES page to print CMYK color samples to match the color values in your application 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT CMYK SAMPLES 5 Press v to select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES The message Printing CMYK Samples appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the sample pages The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the pages Print RGB samples Use the PRINT RGB SAMPLES page to print RGB color samples to match the color values in your application 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT RGB SAMPLES 5 Press v to select PRINT RGB SAMPLES The message Printing RGB Samples appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the sample pages The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the pages 144 Chapter5 Managing the printer ENWW File directory The file directory page contains information for all installed mass storage de
111. S Exec 215 9 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 in and legal size paper can be stapled For more information about supported paper and general information about stapling see Supported media weights and sizes and Using the stapler stacker E NOTE Actual stapler stacker capacity might vary depending on the media type and weight environmental conditions and other factors To print to the stapler stacker select the option in the software application or in the printer driver or at the printer control panel E NOTE Using media that does not meet HP specifications might cause problems that could require repair This repair is not covered by your printer warranty or service agreements Selecting the stapler in an application Windows 1 On the File menu click Print and then click Properties 2 On the Output tab click the drop down list under Staple and click One Staple 130 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW ENWW Macintosh 1 2 3 4 On the File menu click Print Command P Select the Finishing option For the Output destination select Stapler In the Finishing option select 1 Staple Selecting the stapler at the control panel 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu to enter the menus Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE and then press v Press to highlight STAPLER STACKER and then press v Press to highlight STAPLES and then press v Press to highlight 1 EDGE and then press v NOTE Selecting the stapler at the printer
112. The HP ImageREt system sets itself apart from the industry by integrating technology advancements and optimizing each element of the print system Several categories of HP ImageREt have been developed for a variety of user needs The system s foundation is composed of key color laser technologies including image enhancements smart supplies and high resolution imaging As the level or category of ImageREt increases these core technologies are refined for more advanced system usage and additional technologies are integrated HP offers superior image enhancements for general office documents and marketing collateral Optimized for printing on HP color laser high gloss papers HP Image REt 3600 provides superior results on all supported media and under a variety of environmental conditions Paper selection For the best color and image quality it is important to select the appropriate media type from the printer menu or from the front panel See Selecting print media Color options Color options enable optimal color output automatically for diverse types of documents Color options use object tagging which allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used for different objects text graphics and photos on a page The printer driver determines which objects are used on a page and uses halftone and color settings that provide the best print quality for each object Object tagging combined with optimized default settings produces great colo
113. Use only media that meets the HP media specifications for this printer See Supported media weights and sizes Remove media from the input tray and load media that is in good condition Verify that the printing environment is within humidity specifications See Printer specifications Large solid filled areas can cause excessive curl Try using a different pattern Remove media and replace it with media from a fresh unopened package Remove media flex it rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over and then reload it into the input tray Do not fan media If the problem persists replace the media Configure the software for the media see the software documentation Configure the tray for the media see Configuring input trays Duplexing error Table 8 10 Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly Cause and solution Cause Solution You are trying to duplex on unsupported media The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or letterhead Verify that the media is supported for duplex printing See Supported media weights and sizes Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the letterhead or printed side up and the bottom of the page feeding into the printer For Tray 2 and optional trays load these media printed side down with the top of the page toward the back of the
114. Y XX TYPE SIZE To use another tray press v 41 5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY X For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To use another tray press v 44 1 USB ACCESSORY ERROR For help press 49 XXXX PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 50 X FUSER ERROR For help press Media is loaded that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size configured for the tray The printer senses a different media type in the media path than configured in the tray This message appears when a connected USB accessory draws too much power When this happens the ACC port is disabled and printing stops A critical firmware error has occurred A fuser error has occurred The following are specific fuser errors 50 1 A low fuser temperature error has occurred in the main thermistor 50 2 A fuser warm up service error has occurred 50 3 A high fuser temperature error has occurred in the main thermistor 50 6 An open fuser error has occurred 50 7 A fuser pressure release mechanism failure has occurred 1 Ifthe incorrect size was selected cancel the job or press to access help OR 2 Press to select another tray 3 Press and to step through the instructions 1 If the incorrect type was selected cancel the job or press to access help OR 2 Press to select another tray 3 Press and to step through the instructions Press v to see step by step
115. ZZ7T TIT C _ J 264 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards ENWW 4 Grasp the black tabs situated near the top and bottom of the formatter board ee ZZZZ7 TITTY gt _ J 5 Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the printer Place the formatter board on a clean flat grounded surface ENWW Installing a hard disk memory and fonts 265 6 To replace a DDR DIMM that is currently installed spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM slot lift the DDR DIMM up at an angle and pull it out 7 Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package Locate the alignment notch on the bottom edge of the DIMM 8 Holding the DIMM by the edges align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated When installed correctly the metal contacts are not visible 266 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards ENWW 9 Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM E NOTE Ifyou have difficulty inserting the DIMM make sure the notch on the bottom of the DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot If the DIMM still does not go in make sure you are using the correct type of DIMM Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot and then slide the board back into the printer 10 nO oo oS
116. a is loaded in the tray When printing on custom size media from Tray 2 or any of the optional paper trays adjust the switch on the tray to the CUSTOM position and from the control panel set the media size to CUSTOM or ANY CUSTOM Some software applications and printer drivers allow you to specify custom paper size dimensions You can configure custom paper sizes from the printer driver s Paper tab or Forms tab Windows 2000 and XP Be sure to set the correct paper size in both the page setup and print dialog boxes For more information about how to access the printer drivers see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers If your software application requires you to calculate margins for custom size paper see the online Help for that application Special printing situations 133 Stopping a print request You can stop a print request either from the printer control panel or from your software application To stop a print request from a computer on a network see the online Help for the specific network software E NOTE It may take some time for all printing to clear after you have canceled a print job Stopping the current print job from the printer control panel 1 Press Stop on the printer control panel to pause the job that is currently printing The control panel menu provides the option to resume printing or to cancel the current job 2 Press Menu to exit the menu and resume printing 3 Press v to cancel the j
117. admin software to delete files from STORAGE FULL the disk drive To continue press v 5 For 68 1 errors that persist contact HP Support ENWW Control panel messages 191 Control panel message Description Recommended action 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL To continue press v 68 X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS CHANGED For help press alternates with 68 X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS CHANGED To continue press v 69 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 69 X PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 79 XXXX PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 8X YYYY EIO X ERROR 8X YYYY EMBEDDED JETDIRECT ERROR FS DEVICE FAILURE To clear press v A non volatile storage device is full Pressing the Y button should clear the message Printing can continue but there may be unexpected behavior X Description 0 for onboard NVRAM 1 for removable disk flash or hard One or more printer settings saved in the non volatile storage device is invalid and has been reset to its factory default Pressing the w button should clear the message Printing can continue but there may be unexpected behavior A printer error has occurred A critical hardware error has occurred The I O accessory card in slot X has encountered a critical error X Description 1 error in slot 1 2 error in slot 2 This message is generated by a failure of the embedded JetDirect print server A device failure has occu
118. ains basic status e Device Status section Shows printer status information This section will indicate printer alert information for the conditions such as an empty print cartridge It also shows device identification information printer control panel messages and print cartridge levels After you correct a problem with the printer click the button to update the section e Supplies Status section Shows detailed supplies status such as the percentage of toner remaining in the print cartridges and the status of the media that is loaded in each tray e Supplies Details link Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed information about printer supplies ordering information and recycling information Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software 149 150 Chapter 5 Section Support tab Provides help information and links Supplies Ordering window Provides access to online or e mail supplies ordering Alert Settings window Allows you to configure the printer to automatically notify you of printer issues Device List tab Shows information about each printer in the Devices list Find Other Printers window Allows you to add more printers to your printer list Description Printer usage reports Software updates including automatic updates for HP drivers Online diagnostics Online user documentation Online support A Ordering list Shows the supplies that you can order for each printer If
119. and select the Flip pages up checkbox 6 Click OK The Print on Both Sides instructions will appear Follow the instructions to finish printing your document E NOTE Ifthe total number of sheets to be duplexed exceeds the Tray 1 capacity for manual duplex jobs feed the top 100 sheets and press v When prompted feed the next 100 sheets and press v Repeat as necessary until all the sheets from the output stack have been loaded into Tray 1 For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers Printing booklets Some versions of the printer driver let you control the printing of booklets when duplexing You can select binding on the left or right side on letter legal or A4 paper size Windows 2000 and XP supports booklet printing for all paper sizes See the printer driver online Help for more information about the printing booklets feature 128 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW Using the stapler stacker ENWW The optional stapler stacker incorporates an inline stapler and stacker that provides automatic job separation with job offset capability The stapler stacker can handle paper ranging in weight from 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib The stapler stacker output bin can hold up to 750 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper with job offset Standard and custom paper sizes are accepted but only letter A4 JIS B5 215 9 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 in and legal size paper can be stapled For more information about support
120. and then then select Properties then select Properties click Properties Windows 98 and Me or Document Defaults 3 Click the Configure tab The steps can vary this Windows NT 4 0 procedure is most common 20 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW To change the print job default To change the configuration settings for example add a Print on Both Sides by default tray or enable disable Manual Duplexing Operating System To change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed settings for example turn on Windows 2000 XP and Server 2003 Mac OS 9 1 and 9 2 Mac OS X v10 2 8 Mac OS X v10 3 13 On the File menu in the software program click Print Select the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and then click Properties or Preferences The steps can vary this procedure is most common l le On the File menu click Print Change the settings that you want on the various pop up menus On the File menu click Print Change the settings that you want on the various pop up menus On the File menu click Print Change the settings that you want on the various pop up menus 1 Click Start click Settings and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the HP Color LaserJet 4700 icon and then select Printing Preferences 1 On the File menu click Print 2 As you change settings on the pop up menu click Save Settings 1 On the File men
121. ange type or size is shown when a tray transitions from opened to closed Values for this option are Display and DO NOT DISPLAY USE ANOTHER TRAY This menu item allows you to enable or disable the prompt to select another tray Values for this option are ENABLED and DISABLED ENABLED is the default DUPLEX BLANK PAGES This item allows you to determine how a job is to be duplexed The available values are AUTO which is the default value and YES If AUTO is selected blank pages within the print job are not duplexed If YES is selected any blank pages within the job are duplexed IMAGE ROTATION This menu item is available only if an output accessory such as the stapler stacker is not installed The printer applies a 180 rotation to all pages if this menu item is not available or if STANDARD is selected This option lets you place paper in the input tray in the same orientation regardless of the output accessory Setting the printer to use the requested tray 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press v to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press v to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR 66 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW ENWW 7 Press v to select TRAY BEHAVIOR 8 Press v to select USE REQUESTED TRAY 9 Press a or w to select EXCLUSIVELY or FIRST 10 Press v to set the behavior 11 Press Menu Setting manually fe
122. aper is excessively rough Use a smoother xerographic paper Overhead transparency defects Overhead transparencies might display any of the image quality problems that any other type of media could display as well as defects specific to transparencies In addition because transparencies are pliable while in the print path they are subject to being marked by the media handling components EA NOTE Allow transparencies to cool at least 30 seconds before handling them e On the printer driver s Paper tab select Transparency as the media type Also make sure that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies e Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer See Supported media weights and sizes For ordering information see Part numbers e Handle transparencies by the edges Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots and smudges e Small random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages might be caused by transparencies sticking together in the output bin Try printing the job in smaller batches Print quality troubleshooting 251 e Theselected colors are undesirable when printed Select different colors in the software application or printer driver e Ifyou are using a reflective overhead projector use a standard overhead projector instead Print quality problems associated with the environment The printer is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions Verify that th
123. appears before replacing the output stack in tray 1 for printing the second half If a prompt appears on the control panel display press a control panel button to continue Setting the color options Use the Color Options pop up menu to control how colors are interpreted and printed from software programs Using features in the Macintosh printer driver 123 EA NOTE For more information about using the color options see Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers To set the color options 1 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 2 Open the Color Options pop up menu 3 Ifyou are using Mac OS X click Show Advanced Options 4 Manually adjust the individual settings for text graphics and photographs 124 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW Two sided duplex printing Some printer models are capable of duplex printing printing on both sides of a page To find out which models support automatic duplexing see Printer basics All printer models support manual duplexing ENWW EA NOTE You must specify two sided printing options in your software application or in the printer driver in order to print on both sides of the page If this option is not visible in the software application or printer driver use the following information to make duplex printing options available To use two sided printing Verify that the printer driver is configured to show the two sided printing options automa
124. apter4 Printing tasks ENWW ENWW 4 Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend the paper TUL Ta i H BY G B S 1 I N f f N en 4 EA I Y EA NOTE Make sure the paper fits under the tabs on the guides and not above the load level indicators Printing envelopes from Tray 1 Many types of envelopes can be printed from Tray 1 Up to 20 envelopes can be stacked in the tray Printing performance depends on the construction of the envelope In the software set margins at least 15 mm 0 6 inches from the edge of the envelope A CAUTION Envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated linings exposed self stick adhesives or other synthetic materials can severely damage the printer To avoid jams and possible printer damage never try to print on both sides of an envelope Before you load envelopes make sure they are flat undamaged and not stuck together Do not use envelopes with pressure sensitive adhesive Loading envelopes into Tray 1 A CAUTION To avoid jams do not remove or insert envelopes during printing 1 Open Tray 1 Configuring input trays 101 2 Load up to 20 envelopes in the center of Tray 1 with the side to be printed facing down and the postage end toward the printer Slide the envelopes into the printer as far as they will go without forcing them 3 Adjust the guides to touch the envelope stack without bending the envelopes Make
125. are duplex printing see Two sided duplex printing for loading instructions 106 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW 5 Insert the tray into the printer The printer will display the tray s media type and size If the configuration is not correct press the v key when the printer prompts you to configure the tray for type and size For more information see Configuring a tray when loading paper 6 Ifthe configuration is correct press gt to clear the message Loading custom sized media into Tray 2 and optional trays To use custom media you must change the size setting on the control panel to CUSTOM and set the unit of measure X dimension and Y dimension See Configuring a tray to match print job settings for more information 1 Remove tray from the printer 2 Slide the media width guides all the way open and adjust the rear media length guide to the length of the paper being used ENWW Configuring input trays 107 3 Load media into the tray face up Ex NOTE For best performance load the tray completely full without splitting or fanning the ream of paper Splitting or fanning the ream might cause a multi feed problem which could result in a paper jam The capacity of the paper tray can vary For example if you are using 75 g m 20 Ib paper the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets If the media is heavier than 75 g m 20 Ib the tray will not hold a full ream and you must reduce the number of sheets accordingl
126. as already passed through a printer or copier An input tray is loaded incorrectly Print media is skewed Print media is binding or sticking together Print media is removed before it settles into the output bin When duplexing the print media is removed before the second side of the document is printed Print media is in poor condition Print media is not picked up by the internal rollers from Tray 2 or an optional tray Print media has rough or jagged edges Print media is perforated or embossed Printer supply items have reached the end of their useful life Media was not stored correctly See Jam in Tray 1 Use only media that meets HP specifications See Supported media weights and sizes Verify that all print cartridges the transfer unit and the fuser are correctly installed Do not use media that has been previously printed on or copied Remove media from the input tray and replace the media within the tray Adjust the media width guide to hold the media firmly in place without bending it See Configuring input trays Input tray guides are not adjusted correctly Adjust input tray guides so they hold media firmly in place without bending it If media heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib is loaded into Tray 2 and optional trays the media might skew Remove media flex it rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over Reload media into the input tray Do not fan media Reset the printer Wait until the page comple
127. at http Awww hp com support clj4700 Turn the printer off then on Press for more information If the message persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 If prompted to do so press to continue The printer should come to the Ready state but will not make full use of all memory installed Otherwise 1 2 Turn the printer off Verify that all DDR SDRAM meets specifications and is correctly seated Turn the printer on If the problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Turn the printer off then on If the problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Turn the printer off then on If the problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Control panel messages 189 Control panel message Description Recommended action 15 Yellow 16 Magenta 17 Cyan 18 Black 55 0X YY DC A printer command error has occurred 1 Turn the printer off then on CONTROLLER ERROR 2 Ifthe problem persists contact HP Support at http Awww hp com For help press support cli4700 alternates with 55 0X YY PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 56 XX A printer error has occurred 1 Turn the printer off then on PRINTER ERROR 2 If the problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com To continue support clj4700 turn off then on 57 0X A printer fan error has occurred 1 Turn the p
128. auxiliary connection configuration 87 B background printing troubleshooting 244 Bluetooth 89 booklets printing 128 both sides printing on 116 122 C canceling print job 134 cleaning page using 172 clearable warnings setting display time 72 clearing jams 216 218 220 clock setting 148 CMYK samples printing 144 color ENWW adjusting 156 CMYK ink set emulation 153 edge control 15 7 160 four color printing 153 halftone options 157 159 HP ImageREt 3600 152 managing options 156 159 matching 154 neutral grays 158 159 options 152 Pantone matching 154 printed vs monitor 154 printing colorsamples 155 printing in grayscale 156 159 sample book matching 154 SRGB 152 using 152 color options configuring 65 color supply out reporting 74 solution for 249 Color tab settings 118 123 color black mix 65 configuration page printing 142 180 viewing with embedded Web server 147 configure device menu 4 7 53 configuring alerts 175 configuring trays custom paper size 99 from paper handling menu 98 control panel accessing from computer 40 blank display 235 buttons 38 41 configuring 64 display 38 lights 38 42 menus 45 46 overview 37 38 printer personalities 72 problems 238 using in shared environments 78 control panel display options 71 control panel messages 184 controlling print jobs 92 cover pages 115 121 covers 121 custom paper sizes driver settings 115 D Declaration of Confor
129. b to view the status of print media e Toview amore detailed status list click Detailed Supplies Information The Supplies Information dialog box appears e To order supplies online click Order HP Supplies You must have Internet access in order to use the online ordering Web page For more information about online ordering see Ordering supplies online and using other support features Ordering supplies online and using other support features Use the HP Web site to order printer supplies register the printer get customer support or learn about recycling printer supplies You must have Internet access in order to use the supplies and support Web pages 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select HP Support 3 Click one of the following buttons e Instant Support Opens a Web page that you can use to seek technical assistance e Order Supplies Online Opens a Web page that you can use to order printer supplies e Online Registration Opens a Web page that you can use to register the printer e Return amp Recycle Opens a Web page that you can use to find information about recycling used supplies Uploading a file to the printer Send a file from the computer to the printer The action that the printer takes depends on the type of file that you send to it For example when you send a print ready file such as a PS or PCL file the printer prints the file 1 Open the HP Printer Utility
130. b server to designate users who can print in color 6 Press v to save the setting The network administrator can monitor color usage for a specific HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer by printing a color usage job log See Printer information pages for more information For more information on restricting and reporting color usage go to htip www hp com go coloraccess 158 Chapter6 Color ENWW Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers ENWW Setting the color options to Automatic typically produces the best possible print quality for the most common printing requirements However for some documents setting the color options manually can enhance the way the document appears Examples of these documents include marketing brochures that contain many images or documents that are printed on a media type that is not listed in the printer driver Print color as gray or change the color options by using the Color Options pop up menu in the Print dialog box For more information about how to gain access to the printer drivers see Gaining access to the printer drivers Print Color as Gray Selecting the Print Color as Gray option from the printer driver prints a document in black and shades of gray This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output or for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed Advanced color options for text graphics and photographs Use manual color
131. black Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers 159 EA NOTE Some software programs convert text or graphics to raster images In these cases the Photographs settings also control text and graphics RGB Color Five values are available for the RGB Color setting e Select Default SRGB for most printing needs This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as SRGB which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization www e Select Image optimization SRGB to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images such as GIF or JPEG files This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching for rendering SRGB bitmap images This setting has no effect on text or vector based graphics Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement e Select AdobeRGB for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB For example some digital cameras capture images in AdobeRGB and documents that are produced with Adobe PhotoShop use the AdobeRGB color space When printing from a professional software program that uses AdobeRGB it is important that you turn off the color management in the software program and allow the printer software to manage the color space e Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode To render documents properly when this option is selected you must manage color in the program t
132. bleshooting information pages cccccsececssecccseeeecceseecceueeseaeecsseeeceeeessueesseaeessaueessgeessneesseas 180 COM IU ON PAJE gyre cee eaa E ensteawe steele E 180 Paper path test pago ee eee ee ee 180 Registration page cartcasmcssases ii iaietans ensipe diac aasehena nen atndnibancandenitanmestinapecebihinana pinentuasnhseindcadeinnans 181 FSM a sage acts te E cede ders tld E ea ard peat Pea ova alee svete Gaaawunain EE 181 Control panel MESSAGE types cccecccsseeeeceeeeeceneeeceuseeceuaeecsueeecsseeseageessasessaaeesseeessegeessegeesssaeeeess 183 ENWW xii Slal s FIGSSAG CS wasii a a a e dude aamescieadseed 183 Warming MESSdgE Seanina a EE E a 183 Error MCSSAGESS ar s a E A N 183 ChitiCal Grror MESSAGES armirana a a A E a A A 183 Control Panel MESSAGCS esnrrnuneieaiae iee a a a a a 184 WIESSAGS listing riip a a a a a a a ttdivamndiass 184 Paperjam S cresensa e a a a a a 210 Paperjam FOCOV IY sasia anae en loud a aa a Eaa an Sunset oaa 210 To disable paper jam recovery ccccccccecccescceeecceeeeceeeesseeeeseeseeeeseeeseneeneneenes 211 Common Causes Of paper arms isisrsseaniaiear piana a a a S 212 FADE JAIN S ena A yeatea ete 212 Gleanna f 0 gt eee enee ate ee a erent ree Rte ee et Et Re oe tm no 213 aD AMMA WAY gt sree E macmiccces eee EE E A que aanaun saan A Accs S E 213 Jamin Tray 2 OF optional LAYS iiss iecsdcaidacte dens aaa a AEE E S 214 Jams Mi tO COVEN METi ee A A A
133. cable might be defective or of poor quality Make sure that the cables are connected correctly the printer is on and the ready light is on If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub try connecting directly to the computer or use a different port Make sure that the printer PPD is in the following hard drive folder Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lt lang gt lproj where lt lang gt is the two letter language code for the language that you are using If necessary reinstall the software See the getting started guide for instructions Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lt lang gt lproj where lt lang gt is the two letter language code for the language that you are using Reinstall the software See the getting started guide for instructions Make sure that the cables are connected correctly the printer is on and the ready light is on If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub try connecting directly to the computer or use a different port Replace the interface cable Make sure to use a high quality cable A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted Cause Solution The print queue might be stopped The wrong printer name or IP address is being used Another printer Restart the print queue Open print monitor and select Start Jobs Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name IP with
134. ccurred Printer Printer requires attention require attention requires attention amber 42 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Interpreting stapler stacker indicator light codes The following table lists errors that can occur in the stapler stacker unit that are reported by the accessory light and on the printer control panel display ENWW Indicator Solid Blinking Off Green Ex NOTE The indicator light shows solid green during some continuable errors The accessory is ready and is functioning properly Fewer than 20 staples remain in the stapler cartridge STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES appears on the printer control panel display Order and replace the stapler cartridge The number of pages in the job exceeds the 30 page limit for stapling TOO MANY PAGES IN JOB TO STAPLE appears on the printer control panel display For jobs larger than 30 pages staple the pages manually The job contains different paper sizes The stapler cannot align the paper for stapling If stapling is required print the job on same size N A e _ The stapler stacker is in sleep mode the printer is turned off or the stapler stacker is not installed properly Interpreting stapler stacker indicator light codes 43 Indicator Solid Blinking Off paper or staple the job manually MIXED PAPER SIZES IN JOB TO STAPLE appears on the printer control panel display Amber e The accessory is e The device requires us
135. ceived your print job The printer might not be ready Restart the print queue Select the desktop printer icon open the Printing menu in the top menu bar and then click Start Print Queue Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name or IP address Verify that the printer name or IP address on the configuration page matches the printer name or IP address in the Desktop Printer Utility Make sure that the cables are connected correctly the printer is on and the Ready light is on If you are connecting through a USB or Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems 243 Table 8 26 Problems with Mac OS 9 x continued A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted Cause Solution Ethernet hub try connecting directly to the computer or use a different port The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality Replace the interface cable Make sure to use a high quality cable You cannot use the computer while the printer is printing Cause Solution Background Printing has not been selected For LaserWriter 8 6 and later Turn on background printing by selecting Print Desktop on the File menu and then clicking Background Printing in the pop up menu ny An encapsulated PostScript EPS file does not print with the correct fonts Cause Solution This problem occurs with some programs e Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding e Try downloading the fon
136. cover page EA NOTE To print a blank cover page select Standard as the Cover Page Type Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper k 2 3 5 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers Click the Layout pop up menu Next to Pages per Sheet select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet 1 2 4 6 9 or 16 If the number of pages is greater than 1 next to Layout Direction select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet Next to Borders select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet Printing on both sides of the paper When a duplex printing accessory is installed you can automatically print on both sides of a page If a duplex printing accessory is not installed you can manually print on both sides of a page by feeding the paper through the printer a second time 122 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW ENWW To print on both sides by using the duplex printing accessory 1 2 3 4 2 Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job If you are loading special paper such as letterhead load it in one of the following ways e For tray 1 load the letterhead paper with the front side up and the bottom edge feeding
137. d cardstock glossy paper transparencies photo paper Stacking without offset for supported media types NOTE See above Printing from Tray 1 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in Printing from Tray 2 and optional trays 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in 216 x 356 mm to 8 5 x 14 in Printing from Tray 1 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in Printing from Tray 2 and optional trays 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in Range NOTE The stapler stacker bin has a capacity of 750 sheets of 75 g m 20 lb bond A 60 g m 16 Ib bond to 120 g m 32 Ib bond Range 75 g m 20 Ib bond to 120 g m 32 Ib bond ENWW Print media specifications 35 Table 1 5 Stapler stacker continued Stapler stacker Dimensions Weight or thickness Capacity Stapling 30 sheets A NOTE Seeabove g m 16 Ib to 160 g m 1 FE for supported trays on Ey NOTE Media and media sizes types paper and cardstock glossy paper transparencies photo paper Stapling 20 sheets A NOTE See above 60 g m 16 Ib to 220 g m 999 O for supported trays 92 1 E NOTE See above and media sizes for supported media types 36 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW 2 ENWW Control panel This chapter contains information on the printer control panel which provides control of printer functions and communicates information about the printer and
138. d paper resizing documents and inserting watermarks Supported printer drivers The following printer drivers are provided for the product If the printer driver that you want is not on the product CD ROM or is not available on www hp com contact the manufacturer or distributor of the program that you are using and request a driver for the product E NOTE The most recent drivers are available at www hp com Depending on the configuration of Windows based computers the installation program for the product software automatically checks the computer for Internet access in order to obtain the latest drivers NOTE For Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series printers include a monochrome PCL 6 driver that can be installed for users who will be printing only black and white print jobs Operating system PCL 6 printer PCL 5 printer PS printer driver PPD printer driver driver driver Microsoft Windows 98 X X X Windows Millennium Me X X X Windows 2000 X X X Windows XP X X X Windows Server 2003 X X X Mac OS 9 1 and 9 2 X X Mac OS X v10 2 8 and v10 3 X X SESS E 1 Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems See the context sensitive help in the printer driver for available features 2 For Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series printers include a monochrome PCL 6 driver that can be installed for users who will
139. d solution Cause Solution The correct media type is not specified in the software or printer Verify that the correct media type is selected in the software or driver printer driver The input tray is overfilled Remove excess media from the input tray Do not load more than 200 sheets of glossy paper or glossy film or more than 100 transparencies in Tray 2 and optional trays Do not exceed the maximum stack height for Tray 1 Media in another input tray is the same size as the Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or transparencies and the printer is defaulting to the other tray glossy paper is selected in the software application or printer driver For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers Use the printer control panel to configure the tray to the media type loaded The tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is not Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or configured correctly for type glossy paper is selected in the software application or printer driver For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers Use the printer control panel to configure the tray to the media type loaded See Configuring input trays Transparencies or glossy paper might not meet supported Use only media that meets the HP media specifications for this media specifications printer See Supported media weights and s
140. ded E NOTE HP recommends that you replace the stapler cartridge as soon as the REPLACE STAPLER CARTRIDGE message is displayed Although some usable staples remain in the cartridge they could fall into the stapler mechanism and cause product failure Loading a new stapler cartridge 1 On the left side of the stapler stacker open the stapler cartridge cover by gently pulling it EA NOTE For information on ordering a new stapler cartridge part number C8091A see Supplies and accessories 2 Grasp the stapler cartridge handle and pull up gently ENWW Replacing supplies 169 3 Twist the stapler cartridge gently in a counter clockwise direction and pull it out 4 EA NOTE To obtain a new stapler cartridge order part number C8091A 170 Chapter7 Maintenance ENWW 5 Close the stapler cartridge door ENWW Replacing supplies 171 Using the cleaning page During printing toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer Over time this buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing This printer has a cleaning mode that can correct and prevent these problems AaBboCc AaBhec AaABkhCc AQGBQKCC AaBbCc AABoGc AaBbGc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Cleaning the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet 4700n printers at the control panel 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight
141. dentified print cartridge has reached the 1 Order the appropriate print cartridge end of life and the COLOR SUPPLY OUT setting inthe SYSTEM SETUP menuissetto 2 To continue press v STOP AT LOW Printing can continue 3 Open the front and top covers and then open the image transfer unit CAUTION The image transfer unit can be easily damaged 4 Remove the identified print cartridge 5 Install a new print cartridge 6 Close the image transfer unit and the top and front covers 7 Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information The fuser kit has reached the end of its life 1 Open the top cover Replace the fuser kit Printing can continue although print quality might be reduced 2 Grasp the purple handles on the fuser unit 3 Remove the old fuser unit from the printer 4 Install a new fuser unit and secure with thumb screws 5 Close the top cover 6 Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information The fuser is nearing the end of its useful life 1 Order the fuser kit and the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is setto STOP 2 To continue printing press vV AT LOW Printing can continue 3 To replace the fuser kit perform the following steps e Open the top cover e Grasp the purple handles on the fuser uni
142. der new supplies before they need to be replaced Locating supplies Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item a 1 Fuser Print cartridges 3 Transfer unit Supply replacement guidelines To facilitate the replacement of supplies keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the printer e _ Allow sufficient space above and in the front of the printer for removing supplies e The printer should be located on a flat sturdy surface For instructions on installing supplies see the installation guides provided with each supply item or see more information at http www hp com support clj4700 When you connect select Solve a Problem CAUTION Hewlett Packard recommends the use of genuine HP products in this printer Use of non HP products may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the Hewlett Packard extended warranty or service agreements Making room around the printer for replacing supplies The following illustration shows the clearance necessary in front of above and to the side of the printer for replacing supplies Replacing supplies 167 Z ooo X ah ee OJ ss SE oe 4i pase qos qn Q N 1 530 mm 20 9 inches 2 1294 mm 50 inches 3 804 mm 31 7 inches Approximate replacement intervals for supplies The following table lists the estimated replacement
143. dia is not selected in the software Confirm that the settings in the application and printer driver application or printer driver are appropriate since the application settings override the printer driver and control panel settings and the printer driver settings override the control panel settings For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers The correct size media for Tray 1 is not selected in the printer From the control panel select the correct size media for Tray control panel 1 The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the media size for which the tray is configured The guides in the tray are not against the paper Verify that the rear and width media guides are touching the paper Incorrect tray Table 8 4 Printer pulls from incorrect tray Cause and solution Cause Solution You are using a driver for a different printer For more Use a driver for this printer information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers The specified tray is empty Load media in the specified tray Tray behavior for the requested tray is set to FIRST in the Change the setting to EXCLUSIVELY SYSTEM SETUP submenu of the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu ENWW Media handling problems 231 232 Chapter 8 Table 8 4 Printer pulls from incorrect tray continued Cause and solution Cause
144. dinadunus 300 AI Ss EEE D acess tg assets cea A deen gules ise PE EE E E AA AE EN A 301 ASOT SaO or R A A E E E E A E 301 Canadian DOC regulations ccccccccssscccseececeeeeeceueeeceaeeecseeeceueecseueeessueeeseuseesegeesseeeeess 301 EMI Statement KOGA renarna aE a E 301 VCCI statement Japan sscecet acineintirn oaasanteslatsianwoiewiidlweweleuhinesimatameukdiedendbaundeeadebianrdeueoniuetoedt 301 AC cordset statement Japan cccccsecccseeeecseeceeseeceaeeeseusecseueessuseesausesegeeesseeessaeeesaees 301 Laser Statement for Finland ccccccccceecceececeeeccececeeeeeeeesaeecseeesaeeesueeseeeesgeeseeessueeseeesanes 302 see lsc aa ctw A A O E eats AI E PP E A EE E EAN EEEE E E 303 ENWW 1 Printer basics This chapter contains information on setting up your printer and becoming familiar with its features The following topics are covered n Quick access to printer information Printer configurations e Printer features e Walk around e Printer software e Printer drivers e Printer drivers for Macintosh computers e Software for Macintosh computers e Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh e Print media specifications ENWW Quick access to printer information World Wide Web links Printer drivers updated HP printer software and product information and support may be obtained from the following URLs e http www hp com support clj4700 Printer drivers may be obtained from the following si
145. dio technology that can be used to wirelessly connect computers printers personal digital assistants PDAs cell phones and other devices Unlike infrared technology Bluetooth s reliance on radio signals means that devices do not have to be in the same room office or cubicle with an unobstructed line of sight in order to communicate This wireless technology increases portability and efficiency within business network applications The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer uses a Bluetooth adapter HP bt1300 to incorporate Bluetooth wireless technology The adapter is available for either USB or parallel connections The adapter has a 10 meter line of sight operation range in the 2 5 GHz ISM band and can achieve data transfer rates up to 723 Kbps The device supports the following Bluetooth profiles e Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile HCRP e Serial Port Profile SPP e Object Push Profile OPP e Basic Imaging Profile BIP e Basic Printing Profile BPP with XHTML Print ENWW Wireless printing 89 90 Chapter 3 I O configuration ENWW 4 Printing tasks This chapter describes how to perform basic printing tasks The following topics are covered e Controlling print jobs e Selecting print media e Automatic media type sensing auto sense mode e Configuring input trays e Printing on special media e Using features in the printer driver e Using features in the Macintosh printer driver e Two sided duplex printing e Usin
146. dobe Systems TrueType is a U S trademark of Apple Computer Inc UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group Windows MS Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation ENWW HP customer care Online services For 24 hour access to information using a modem or Internet connection World Wide Web URL for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers updated HP printer software product and support information and printer drivers in several languages can be obtained from http www hp com support clj4700 Sites are in English Visit http www hp com support net_printing for information about network printing using HP Jetdirect print servers HP Instant Support Professional Edition ISPE is a suite of Web based troubleshooting tools for desktop computing and printing products ISPE helps you quickly identify diagnose and resolve computing and printing problems The ISPE tools may be accesssed from http instantsupport hp com Telephone support HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period When you call you will be connected to a responsive team waiting to help you For the telephone number for your country region see the flyer that shipped in the box with the product You can also visit http www hp com and then click Contact HP and then click Contact HP Worldwide Before calling HP have the following information ready product name and serial number da
147. duct is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number s Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA 05 January 2005 For regulatory topics only Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard Gmbh Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Stra e 140 D 71034 B blingen Germany FAX 49 7031 14 3143 USA Contact Product Relations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise Idaho 83707 0015 USA Phone 208 396 6000 300 AppendixE Regulatory information ENWW Safety statements ENWW Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States The printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation AN WARNING Using controls making adj
148. e 126 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW ENWW EA NOTE To select two sided printing from the printer driver the driver must first be properly configured For instructions see the online Help for the printer driver For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers Options for binding two sided printing jobs Before printing a two sided document use the printer driver to choose the edge on which you will bind your finished document Long edge or book binding is the conventional layout used in book binding Short edge or tablet binding is the typical calendar binding EA NOTE The default binding setting is to bind on the long edge when the page is set up for portrait orientation To change to long edge binding click the Flip Pages Up check box TTT N 1 Long edge landscape This layout is often used in accounting data processing and spreadsheet programs Every other printed image is oriented upside down Facing pages are read continuously from top to bottom 2 Short edge landscape Each printed image is oriented right side up Facing pages are read from top to bottom on the left page then from top to bottom on the right page 3 Long edge portrait This is the default printer setting and the most common layout used with every printed image oriented righ
149. e No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary Open the top and front covers CAUTION The image transfer unit can be easily damaged Open the image transfer unit Remove the incorrect print cartridge Install the correct print cartridge Close image transfer unit and then close the top and front covers Re enter PIN correctly Press to access the SUPPLIES STATUS menu Press and to highlight the specific supply that has a problem Press to view help for the supply Press and to step through the instructions No action necessary No action necessary Close the tray indicated 196 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action INSTALL FUSER INSTALL SUPPLIES For status press v The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges INSTALL TRANSFER UNIT INSUFFICIENT MEMORY TO LOAD FONTS DATA For help press alternates with Device To continue press v Internal disk initializing INTERNAL DISK NOT FUNCTIONAL Internal disk spinning up LOAD TRAY 1 lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press LOAD TRAY 1 lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt The fuser is not installed or is not installed correctly At least one supply item is missing or is not correctly seated in the printer and another supply item is missing incorrectly placed out or low Insert the sup
150. e For ordering information see Part numbers Tray 1 can process heavy media from 60 g m to 220 g m 16 Ib to 60 Ib as well as standard 80 Ib cover stock For ordering information see Part numbers Tray 2 and optional trays can process media from 60 g m to 120 g m 16 Ib to 32 Ib Prints on a wide range of media types including HP laser photo media glossy papers and transparencies as well as heavy stock labels and envelopes Prints multiple gloss levels Standard 100 sheet multi purpose paper tray Tray 1 supports letter legal executive 8 5 X 13 JIS B5 executive JIS 16K A4 A5 and custom media Standard 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 2 that supports letter legal executive 8 5 X 13 JIS B5 executive JIS 16K A4 A5 and custom media Up to four additional 500 sheet paper feeders Trays 3 4 5 and 6 support letter legal executive 8 5 X 13 JIS B5 executive JIS 16K A4 A5 and custom media Standard 500 sheet face down output bin Duplexer for automatic two sided printing duplexing standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn and HP Color LaserJet 4700ph printers Automatic duplexing of 120 g m 32 Ib paper at full speed 30 sides 15 sheets per minute Stapler stacker prints up to 750 sheets with job offset and staples up to 30 sheets standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph Printer hard disk which provides storage for fonts and macros as well as additional
151. e YS PS Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY Press v to select PRINT QUALITY Press to highlight AUTO CLEANING Press v to select AUTO CLEANING Press to highlight the desired value Press v to select the desired value Setting the cleaning interval The CLEANING INTERVAL menu option allows you to set the interval at which the auto cleaning is due for the printer The cleaning interval can be set anywhere from 1 000 to 20 000 pages 1 2 3 4 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press w to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY Using the cleaning page 173 Press v to select PRINT QUALITY Press to highlight CLEANING INTERVAL Press v to select CLEANING INTERVAL Press to highlight the desired value eae ae E i Press v to select the desired value 174 Chapter7 Maintenance ENWW Configuring alerts You can use HP Web Jetadmin or the printer s embedded Web server to configure the system to alert you of problems with the printer The alerts take the form of e mail messages to the e mail account or accounts that you specify You can configure the following e The printer s you want to monitor e What alerts are to be received for example alerts for paper jams paper out supplies status and cover open The e mail account to which
152. e default for USE ANOTHER TRAY is ENABLED The default for MANUALLY FEED PROMPT is ALWAYS PS DEFER MEDIA affects how paper is handled when printing from an Adobe PS print driver ENABLED uses HP s paper handling DISABLED uses the Adobe PS paper handling The default is ENABLED The default for DUPLEX BLANK PAGES is AUTO The default for IMAGE ROTATION is Standard See Changing printer control panel configuration settings for more information Reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for the selected period The default is 30 MINUTES The default is DAILY at 7 30 AM This menu item opens a wizard that can be used to set the printer wake time Sets the brightness of the control panel display The default is 5 Sets the default personality to automatic switching PCL PDF or PostScript emulation modes The default is AUTO Sets whether a warning is cleared on the control panel or when another job is sent The default is JOB Determines printer behavior when the system generates an Auto Continuable error The default is ON Sets printer behavior when a cartridge is low The default is STOP AT OUT This option allows the printer to continue printing until a color supply is exhausted When the printer is set to STOP AT LOW printing 58 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Menu item Values Description ORDER AT COLOR SUPPLY OUT JAM RECOVERY RAM DISK LANGUAGE RANGE 0 100
153. e printer The maximum number allowed is 100 and the default value is 32 Setting the job storage limit 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight JOB STORAGE LIMIT Press v to select JOB STORAGE LIMIT Press a or w to change the value Pe tae rn p r p Press v to set the value Press Menu Job held timeout This option sets the period of time that the system keeps files in job storage before deleting them from the queue The default setting for this option is OFF the other available settings are 1 HOUR 4 HOURS 1 DAY and 1 WEEK Setting the job held timeout 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE 2 3 4 Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP 5 Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP 6 Press to highlight JOB HELD TIMEOUT 64 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW ENWW 9 10 Press v to select JOB HELD TIMEOUT Press a or to select the appropriate time period Press v to set the time period Press Menu Show IP address This item determines whether the printer IP address is shown on the display with the Ready message Options are AUTO and OFF The default setting for this option is OFF If more than one EIO card is installed the IP address of the card installed in the first slot appea
154. e printing environment is within specifications See Environmental specifications Print quality problems associated with jams e Make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path See Paper jam recovery e The printer recently jammed Print two to three pages to clean the printer e The media does not pass through the fuser causing image defects to appear on subsequent documents Print two to three pages to clean the printer However if the problem persists see the next section Print quality troubleshooting pages The print quality troubleshooting pages provide information on aspects of the printer that affect print quality 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press v to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING 5 Press v to select PQ TROUBLESHOOTING The message Printing PQ troubleshooting appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the print quality troubleshooting information The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the print quality troubleshooting information The print quality troubleshooting information includes one page for each color black magenta cyan and yellow printer statistics related to print quality instructions on interpreting the information and procedures to solve print quality problems If following the procedures recommended by the print quality troubleshooting pages do not improve print quality go to http
155. e that you do not have too many USB devices drawing power from the chain Disconnect all of the devices from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host computer e Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are connected in a row on the chain Disconnect all of the devices from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host computer E NOTE The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub Solving problems with Mac OS X Table 8 27 Problems with Mac OS X The printer driver is not listed in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Cause The printer software might not have been installed or was installed incorrectly The Postscript Printer Description PPD file is corrupt Solution Make sure that the printer PPD is in the following hard drive folder Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lt lang gt lproj where lt lang gt is the two letter language code for the language that you are using If necessary reinstall the software See the getting started guide for instructions Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lt lang gt lproj where lt lang gt is the two letter language code for the language that you are using Reinstall the software See the getting started guide for instructions Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems 245 Table 8 27 Problems with Mac OS X continued The printer na
156. e the printer Flash memory card A small sized high quality removable memory card font A complete set of letters numerals and symbols in a typeface fuser The assembly that uses heat to fuse the toner onto the paper or other media grayscale Various shades of gray ENWW Glossary 303 halftone pattern A halftone pattern uses differing sizes of ink dots to produce a continuous tone image such as a photograph HP Jetdirect HP product for network printing HP Web Jetadmin HP trademarked device management software that lets you manage a single printer or multiple printers using a Web browser I O An acronym for input output and refers to computer port settings IP address The unique number assigned to a computer device connected to a network IPX SPX An acronym for internetwork packet exchange sequenced packet exchange macro A single keystroke or command that results in a series of actions or instructions media The paper labels transparencies or other material on which the printer prints the image memory tag A memory partition with a specific address MIME An acronym for Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions monochrome Black and white Devoid of color mopy The HP term for multiple original prints capability network A system of computers interconnected by telephone wires or other means in order to share information network administrator A person who manages a network page buffer Temporary printer memory used to hold
157. e the printer CMYK samples page is being generated The printer is generating the configuration page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the demo page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the diagnostics page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the engine test page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the event log page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the mass storage directory page The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed 1 Press to view help for the message 2 Obtain the transfer kit part number from help 3 Order the transfer kit EA NOTE Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information Press the Stop key No action necessary Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to Ready No action necessary No action necessary Press to continue printing No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary ENWW Control panel messag
158. e tray completely full without splitting or fanning the ream of paper Splitting or fanning the ream might cause a multi feed problem which could result in a paper jam The capacity of the paper tray can vary For example if you are using 75 g m 20 Ib paper the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets If the media is heavier than 75 g m 20 Ib the tray will not hold a full ream and you must reduce the number of sheets accordingly Do not overfill the tray because the printer might not pick up the paper NOTE Ifthe tray is not properly adjusted the printer might display an error message or the media might jam NOTE If you are duplex printing see Two sided duplex printing for loading instructions 104 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW 5 Insert the tray into the printer The printer will display the tray s media type and size If the configuration is not correct press the v key when the printer prompts you to configure the tray for type and size For more information see Configuring a tray when loading paper 6 Ifthe configuration is correct press gt to clear the message Loading undetectable standard sized media into Tray 2 and optional trays CAUTION If paper is loaded in Trays 3 through 6 when the printer is in sleep mode the new paper will not be sensed when the printer comes out of sleep mode This could cause the wrong paper to be used for a print job Be sure to wake the printer before loading paper in these trays U
159. eaeeeeseeeesaeeeesaeeeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeess 243 Solving problems with Mac OS X ccceccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeeaeeesseeeeseneess 245 Color printing ProDleOMs ccccccccecccceeeceeeeceeeeseeeceeeceecesaeeeseeeesaeeseuceseueesaeessueeseueesaeessueesaeeeeseneesaaes 249 PANOUL COIRO OT siccoiun snares aneosancpuoinnnaneie EE E E 249 WNC OTS CU SUNS e erate ete cw cere A E EE E ET E E RE 249 MISSIO COON sasra E E E E ET 249 CGE EON ereraa E E 250 Color TALC I OOT asrina E 250 Printguality troubleshooting cine ciecauneies dncoastissainecns eign aera Ea aoea EATR 251 Print quality problems associated with media cccccceecc cece eecceeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeseeesaeeseeeeeeees 251 Overhead transparency defects ccccccceececsseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaneeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeas 251 Print quality problems associated with the environment ccccceeecceeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeenees 252 Print quality problems associated with JAMS cccseeccseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeessueeaeeeaaaes 252 Print quality troubleshooting PAGES cecccseecccseecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeesseeessaeessaaes 252 Print quality troubleshooting tool 0 0 0 cceceececseeeceeeeeeeeeeseneeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesneeeaes 252 Calibrating the printer seiicesicaccesweesedeadssatinunscuandusdsenddadsecsbnaduskedaduveesancenadeatanesdunssadedecandbeccteant 253 Repetitive defect ruler ne
160. ect the interface cable For Jetdirect network connections verify that the Link LED is on The Link LED indicates that a proper network connection is established See Changing printer control panel configuration settings for configuration information Configure the printer to match the computer configuration Try using an application that you know works properly to check the computer or in DOS type Dir gt Prn at the DOS prompt Run another peripheral connected to this port to verify that the port is working properly Use the appropriate utility to name the printer on the network For Macintosh OS 9 x computers select the printer from within the Chooser For Macintosh OS 10 2 and later open the Print Center Application select the connection type and select the printer Problem solving ENWW Printer selection Table 8 14 Unable to select the printer from the computer Cause and solution Cause Solution If you are using a switch box the printer might not be selected Select the correct printer through the switch box for the computer The printer s Ready indicator light is not lit Press Stop to return the printer to the Ready state A printer message other than Ready appears on the printer See Control panel messages control panel The correct printer driver is not installed in the computer Install the correct printer driver For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers
161. ed The parallel buffer has overflowed during a busy state The USB buffer has overflowed during a busy state A connection with the card in EIO slot X has been broken A connection with the embedded JetDirect print server has been broken Recommended action 1 Press to continue printing E NOTE A loss of data will occur 2 Ifthe message persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Press to continue When this error occurs data might be lost If necessary resend the job to the printer 1 Press to resume printing E NOTE A loss of data will occur 2 If the message persists disconnect the parallel cable at both ends and reconnect 3 Ifthe message still persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 Press to continue printing B NOTE A loss of data will occur 2 Ifthe message persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 Press to continue printing E NOTE A loss of data will occur 2 Ifthe message persists contact HP Support at http Awww hp com support clij4700 Turn the printer off then on Press for more information If the message persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Control panel messages 18 7 Control panel message Description Recommended action 41 3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY X For help press alternates with LOAD TRA
162. ed paper see Supported media weights and sizes EA NOTE Actual stapler stacker capacity might vary depending on the media type and weight environmental conditions and other factors The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled in a single job varies according to the weight and type of the paper that is used e Jobs containing up to 30 sheets of paper weighing from 60 to 160 g m 16 to 42 Ib can be stapled e Jobs containing up to 20 sheets of paper weighing from 160 to 220 g m 42 to 58 Ib can be stapled e Jobs containing up to 20 sheets of heavy papers such as HP Tough Paper and HP High Gloss laser paper can be stapled e Ifa job consists of only one sheet or more than 30 sheets the job is printed to the output bin but is not stapled EA NOTE The stapler supports paper only Do not try to staple other media such as envelopes transparencies or labels To staple a print job select the stapler in the application You can usually select the stapler in the application or printer driver although some options might be available only in the printer driver You might need to configure the printer driver to recognize the stapler stacker You need to set this setting only once If you cannot select the stapler in the program or printer driver select the stapler at the printer control panel Configuring the printer driver to recognize the stapler stacker Windows 1 Open the Printers folder 2 Select HP Color LaserJet 4700
163. ed prompt 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR Press v to select TRAY BEHAVIOR Press to highlight MANUALLY FEED PROMPT PF re FS YS 6 Press v to select MANUALLY FEED PROMPT Press or w to select ALWAYS or UNLESS LOADED Press v to set the behavior 12 Press Menu Setting the printer default for PS defer media 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR Press v to select TRAY BEHAVIOR Press to highlight PS DEFER MEDIA SS PS m pe P wp Press v to select PS DEFER MEDIA c Press v to select ENABLED or DISABLED Press v to set the behavior N Press Menu Changing printer control panel configuration settings 67 Setting the printer to use size type prompt 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR Press v to select TRAY BEHAVIOR Press to highlight SIZE TYPE PROMPT re FF a p S rN Press v to set the behavior 11 Press Me
164. eeding into the printer first Labels EA NOTE For printing labels set the tray s media type to LABELS in the printer control panel See Configuring input trays When printing labels use the following guidelines e Verify that the labels adhesive material can tolerate temperatures of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Verify that there is no exposed adhesive material between the labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause printer jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to printer components Do not re feed a sheet of labels e Verify that the labels lie flat e Do not use labels that are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Heavy paper The following heavy paper types can be used with the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer 110 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW ENWW Paper type Paper weight Heavy and extra heavy stock 105 163 g m 28 43 Ib Cardstock 164 220 g m 43 58 Ib Intermediate 90 105 g m 24 28 Ib HP Tough paper 5 mil When printing on heavy paper types use the following guidelines Use Tray 1 for paper that is heavier than 120 g m 32 Ib For optimum results when printing on heavy paper use the printer control panel to set the media type for the tray to HEAVY In either the software application or the driver select Heavy as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for heavy paper Because this setting affects all print jobs it is
165. eeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeas 80 Manually configuring TCP IP parameters from the printer control panel 80 Setting an IP address a5 sseeschewestedecwenpadeereseesieunns cmmeteastewetvasaveenseeumuecseniseaabeen 80 Setting the subnet MASK cccecccssseeecseeeeceeeeeceeeeecegeeceeuseeeeeeessaeeessaeeesseeeeess 81 Setting the default gateway cccccsecccseseccesseeceeeeceesseeeeaeeeseaseessaeeessueesseeeeess 82 Disabling network protocols optional ccccececsececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseusesaeeeeaeees 82 DIS AG WP ole aaah escnean sash E E E E E E EN 83 Disabling DEC ELC sasareanna n A E Aaaa Eaa 83 Disabling Apple Talk seision iann eaii aaa Ta Aann 84 Parallel COMMON AWOM suresi EET E 85 U oB cConnguraloN ssir e E A A AEE 86 Auxiliary connection configuration ccccceecccceeceeceeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaaeeeeseneeeas 87 HP Jetdirect print servers ccccccccccsecceeceeeceeecceecacecaeecaeecauecauecsueceueeeeesaeecsuecaeecauecsueseeessaeessessaeessass 88 Available software solutions ccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesseeessneeeseneesaees 88 MIEN SS PARUN ees E EET T E ETE E E E E A E S 89 IEEE G02 F SaNaT O nE N E E AE E AE EA EE 89 PUCO O eene E EEE E AEEA EE EEEE 89 4 Printing tasks Controlling print jobS asses ee essed cepa accioncschinsunsieieencdlss dee esau dais eetepsses sah od gewa au isnt cetuadsanenap ees 92 16 0
166. eeeeneeeeseeeeeseeeesaeees 119 USING the SCIVICCS TAD xseovedtssocac tect ab duguseradeateuiiedeadissaddeiged tila dish edeneehaddea eee 119 Using features in the Macintosh printer driver ccccccccceececaeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesaeeeeeseueeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeaaaees 121 Creating and using presets IN Mac OS X ceccccssscecceseeceneecceessecceaeeeseueeessaeeesseeeesseeeeess 121 FRING A COVEr PAGS assena a sancuduantevec a E E 121 Printing multiple pages on one sheet Of paper nennnnnnnnnennnnninnnnninnnnsrrnnrnnrnnrrenrsnrenrnni 122 Printing on both sides of the paper ccc cecccceccceeccceececeeeeceeeeceeesseeseeeeseueeseeseaeeeseeeees 122 Setting the color OPUONS aicesinddincstaleste nicked lie aati a dew a bleaches 123 Two sided duplex Printing ssisssssesisetuae niaii ties a a a aa aa a 125 Control panel settings for automatic two sided printing ccccceccceecceseeeaeeeseeeeaeeeseeeens 126 To enable or disable two sided printing from the printer control panel 126 Options for binding two sided Printing jODS cccecccceeececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeseeeesaaeeeees 127 Manual two sided printing ccccccsececsscecsececeeeeceeeeceueecseeeceeeeseaeesaseesseesaseeseeeensseesseeeenes 127 Poning DOOK ElSe a aa a a aa a aaa 128 Using the Staplel SIA CK ON arinerieneiniini a a a e a aden 129 Configuring the printer driver to recognize the stapler stacker
167. elect ON or OFF e S a Fe e a r Press v to set the selection Press Menu Wake time The wake time feature allows you to instruct the printer to wake at a certain time on selected days to eliminate waiting for the warm up and calibration periods You must have SLEEP MODE on to set the wake time To set or change the wake time use the following steps Setting the wake time 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight WAKE TIME Press v to select WAKE TIME oo oe YF eS YS UP Press a or to select the day of the week 70 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW ENWW 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Press v to accept the selection Press a or w to select CUSTOM or Off Press v to accept the selection Press a or w to select the hour Press v to accept the selection Press a or w to select the minutes Press v to accept the selection Press a or w to select AM or PM Press v to accept the selection Press v to enter APPLY TO ALL DAYS Press a or w to select YES or NO Press v to accept the selection Press a or v to select the days of the week to which WAKE TIME applies Press v to accept each selection Press Menu Display brightness The display brightness feature allows you to set the level of brightness
168. enu configuration e View and print internal pages e Receive notification of printer and supplies events e Add or customize links to other Web sites e Select the language in which to display the embedded Web server pages e View and change network configuration For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server see Using the embedded Web server Other components and utilities Several software applications are available for Windows and Mac OS users as well as for network administrators Windows Mac OS Network administrator e Software installer automates the e PostScript Printer Description files e HP Web Jetadmin a browser printing system installation PPDs for use with the Apple based system management tool PostScript drivers that comes with See http www hp com go e Online Web registration the Mac OS webjetadmin for the latest HP Web Jetadmin software e HP LaserJet Utility available from the Internet a printer e HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for management utility for Mac OS UNIX available for download users from http www hp com support net_printing Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW Printer drivers ENWW The product comes with software that allows the computer to communicate with the product by using a printer language This software is called a printer driver Printer drivers provide access to product features such as printing on custom size
169. er Cause and solution Cause Solution The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the See the printer driver s online Help for instructions on how to optional trays or the duplexer configure the driver to recognize printer accessories For more Software application problems 241 Table 8 25 Printer driver does not recognize the optional trays or the duplexer continued Cause and solution Cause Solution information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers The accessory might not be installed Verify that the accessory is properly installed a a a SSS SSS SSS 242 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems This section lists problems that can occur when using Mac OS 9 x or Mac OS X Solving problems with Mac OS 9 x Table 8 26 Problems with Mac OS 9 x will not appear in the Chooser NOTE Setup for USB and IP printing is performed through the Desktop Printer Utility The printer The printer name or IP address does not appear in the Desktop Printer Utility Cause Solution The printer might not be ready The wrong connection type might be selected The wrong printer name or IP address is being used The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality Make sure that the cables are connected correctly the printer is on and the Ready light is on If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub t
170. er the printer will not pull the letterhead from that tray Instead it will pull paper from a tray that has plain paper loaded and is configured for plain paper on the printer control panel Selecting media by Type and Size results in significantly better print quality for heavy paper glossy paper and transparencies Using the wrong setting might result in unsatisfactory print quality Always print by Type for special print media such as labels or heavy media Print by Size for envelopes if possible e Ifyou want to print by Type or Size select the type or size from the Page Setup dialog box the Print dialog box or the Print Properties dialog box depending on the application Ifyou often print on a certain type or size of media the printer administrator for a network printer or you for a local printer can configure a tray for that type or size Then when you choose that type or size as you print a job the printer pulls media from the tray configured for that type or size Print setting priorities Changes made to print settings are prioritized according to where the changes are made as follows EA NOTE The names of commands and dialog boxes may vary depending on your program e Page Setup dialog box This dialog box opens when you click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in Settings changed here override settings changed anywhere else e Print dialog box This dialog box opens when
171. er N A experiencing a hardware intervention The bin malfunction could be full there could be a stapler jam or the For more information stapler cartridge could see Control panel require replacement For messages more information see Control panel messages If the message CORRUPT FIRMWARE IN EXTERNAL ACCESSORY appears download the firmware again e There is a paper jam or a sheet needs to be removed from the unit even if the sheet is not jammed For more information see Jams in the stapler stacker e The bin is full Empty the bin before continuing e There are fewer than 30 staples remaining in the stapler cartridge To avoid jams these staples should not be used Order and install a new stapler cartridge before continuing e The bin is in the up position Lower the bin before continuing e The jam access door is open Close the door before continuing e The stapler unit is open Close the unit before continuing E 44 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Control panel menus You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer through the printer driver or software application This is the most convenient way to control the printer and will override the printer control panel settings See the help files associated with the software or for more information on accessing the printer driver see Printer software ENWW You can also control the printer by changing settings in the printer s
172. er cartridge is empty and the printer is configured to stop printing when the cartridge is empty The parallel port might have a DOS timeout error The PS PostScript Emulation personality is not selected The correct driver is not selected in the software application or printer driver Press Stop to return the printer to the Ready state Close the top cover firmly The printer is probably still receiving data Wait for the Data indicator to stop flashing Replace the print cartridge specified on the printer display See Control panel messages Remove some or all of the media in the output bin Replace the stapler cartridge Add a MODE command to the AUTOEXEC BAT file See the DOS manual for additional information Select PS or AUTO for the printer language For more information see Changing printer control panel configuration settings Select the driver for PostScript Emulation for this printer in the software application or printer driver For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers Printer response problems 235 236 Chapter 8 Table 8 12 Printer is on but nothing prints continued Cause and solution Cause Solution The printer is not properly configured The computer port is not configured or is not working properly The printer has not been correctly named for the network or for a Macintosh computer See Changing printer control panel configurat
173. er stacker from the rear of the printer M j a a kuii 4 Set the stapler stacker aside on a flat surface 224 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW 5 Remove any visible paper from the stapler stacker 6 Place the stapler stacker unit onto the printer pT ENWW Clearing jams 225 Jams at the output bin A Remove any jammed paper at the output bin EA NOTE Onall stapler stacker jams be sure that there is no jammed media in the duplexer path or inside the stapler stacker or printer See the other jam recovery procedures included in this section for assistance 226 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Staple jams NOTE Clear staple jams when the message 13 XX X JAM IN STAPLER appears on the control panel display 1 On the left side of the stapler stacker open the stapler cartridge cover by gently pulling it 2 ENWW Clearing jams 22 7 3 Twist the stapler cartridge gently in a counter clockwise direction and pull it out 4 Lift the cover at the tip of the cartridge 228 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW 6 Place the stapler cartridge in the stapler unit Press it down until it snaps into place 7 EA NOTE The stapler needs to reload after clearing a staple jam so the first few documents up to five might not be stapled The stapler stacker might make a noise as the stapler reloads staples The noise will stop after a few documents are stapled If a print job is sent and the
174. er that came in the printer box or go to http www hp com support clj4700 for help or more information 14 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW ENWW Setting up a Windows computer to use the network printer with Windows sharing If the computer will print directly to the printer you can share the printer on the network so that other network users can print to it See your Windows documentation to enable Windows sharing After the printer is shared install the printer software on all computers that share the printer Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected If you have already connected a parallel or USB cable to a Windows computer the New Hardware Found dialog box appears when you turn on the computer Installing the software for Windows 98 or Windows Me 1 In the New Hardware Found dialog box click Search CD ROM drive 2 Click Next 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen 4 Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed If installation fails reinstall the software If this fails check the installation notes and readme files on the printer CD ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box or go to http Awww hp com support clj 4700 for help or more information Installing the software for Windows 2000 or Windows XP 1 In the New Hardware Found dialog box click Search 2 Onthe Locate Driver Files screen select the
175. ers are equipped with embedded HP Jetdirect print servers These servers support Ethernet 10 100T networking for peripherals An HP Jetdirect EIO print server can also be installed in one of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printers EIO slots to allow network connection E NOTE Installation of an EIO print server and network configuration should be performed by a network administrator Configure the card either through the control panel or with HP Web Jetadmin software Available software solutions For a summary of available software solutions refer to the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide or visit http Awww hp com support net_printing Chapter 3 I O configuration ENWW Wireless printing Wireless networks offer a safe secure and cost effective alternative to traditional wired network connections See Supplies and accessories for a list of available wireless print servers IEEE 802 11 standard Optional HP Jetdirect wireless print servers support connection to an 802 11 network This wireless technology provides a high quality printing solution without the physical constraints of wiring Peripherals can be conveniently placed anywhere in an office or home and can be easily moved without changing network cables Installation is easy with the HP Install Network Printer Wizard EA NOTE HP Jetdirect 802 11 print servers are available for USB connections Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless technology is a low power short range ra
176. es 201 Control panel message Description Recommended action Printing FONT LIST Printing MENU MAP Printing PQ TROUBLESHOOTING Printing REGISTRATION PAGE Printing RGB Samples Printing SUPPLIES STATUS Printing Usage Page Processing duplex job Do not grab paper until job completes Processing Processing copy lt X gt of lt Y gt Processing from tray xx Processing INTERMITTENT MODE For help press RAM DISK SYSTEM IS FULL The printer is generating either the PCL or PS personality typeface list The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the printer menu map The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the print quality troubleshooting pages The printer will return to the Ready state when the pages are printed The printer is generating the registration page The printer will return to the SET REGISTRATION menu when the page is completed This message displays while the printer RGB samples page is being generated The printer is generating the supplies status page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the usage page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job
177. escription Recommended action Creating CLEANING PAGE DATA RECEIVED To print last page press v alternates with Ready To print last page press v DATE TIME DELETING PRIVATE JOBS Deleting DISK DEVICE FAILURE To clear press v alternates with Ready DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED To clear press v alternates with Ready DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL To clear press v alternates with Ready DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED To clear press v alternates with Ready This message is displayed while a cleaning page Is being generated When the page is complete the control panel display backs up one screen to the PRINT QUALITY menu The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed When the printer receives another file the message should disappear Prompt for setting the printer date and time Default format is YYYY MMM DD HH MM The printer is deleting a private stored job A PIN is required to delete a private job The printer is currently deleting the stored job A device failure has occurred on the specified drive Printing may continue for jobs that do not require access to the disk drive The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation for example to download a file to anon existent directory Printing may continue The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system but
178. eseeessueesueeseeeeseeeeeeeess 22 Gaining access to the printer drivers cccccccssecccesceceseeceseecceeeceeeeceeaeeeesueesseesessesessaeeess 22 Software for Macintosh computers ccccccseecceeeceeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeesseeesseceeseeesseesseeessneeeseeeens 24 Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks ccsecceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeaes 24 Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections USB 25 To remove software from Macintosh operating systems ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaes 26 Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 20 0 0 cece ceeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeesseeeeseeeesaeeeeas 27 Opening the HP Printer Utility cc ccccceecceeseeceeseeceeseceeueeesaeesseaseeseeeesseeessegeesseeeeess 27 P rntng a cleaning page ssiniencsiscinwaachuennevalawasarssinadevvuasiwiunsuandsaneanenedethiunnstnesapesatdeedesdinawecsuues 27 Printing configuration paga siwicicscetteatsicsnedceiassveesdivedubaveedioetstlendadisessdaneedeiesecasiadondwecaasecebiess 27 Viewing supplies status ccccecceecceeeceeeceeececeecceeeasecaeecseecaeeseesaueceuesaeesaeesaeeteeeseessensagees 28 Ordering supplies online and using other support features cece ceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 Uploading a file to the printer cexcensdecctseccnseeweshecadeses aaisan aa aeaa a ia i 28 Uploading fonts to the printer
179. ess MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE To use another tray press v alternates with MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE For help press MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK alternates with Then press v to print second sides MIXED PAPER SIZES IN JOB TO STAPLE Moving solenoid To exit press Stop Moving solenoid and motor To exit press Stop No job to cancel NO STORED JOBS A job was sent specifying MANUAL FEED and Tray 1 is empty No other tray is available The job specifies MANUAL FEED but Tray 1 is already loaded and configured for a type or size other than that specified in the job A job was sent that specified MANUAL FEED and Tray 1 is empty Another tray is available The even numbered pages of a manual two sided document have been printed and the printer is waiting for the output stack to be inserted for the odd numbered pages to be printed The job contains different paper sizes and cannot be stapled The status light is solid green The printer is executing a component test and the component selected is a solenoid The printer is executing a component test and the components selected are the solenoid and the motor There are no stored jobs that can be cancelled No jobs stored on the EIO disk This message is displayed when the user enters the RETRIEVE JOB menu and there are no jobs to retrieve 1 Load Tray 1 with the correct paper and press to continue 2 If prompted confirm the size and type pape
180. ess print server external Q7501A Printer stand Q7499A Optional 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 4 5 or 6 Q7003A Stapler stacker EA NOTE A stapler stacker can mi be added to models that are equipped with an external duplexer Printer supplies C8091A Stapler cartridge refill 5 000 staples Q5950A Black print cartridge Q5951A Cyan print cartridge Q5952A Yellow print cartridge Q5953A Magenta print cartridge Q7504A Image transfer ETB kit Q7502A Image fuser kit 110 volt Q7503A Image fuser kit 220 volt Cables C2946A IEEE 1284 C compliant parallel cable 3 meters approximately 10 feet long with 25 pin male micro 36 pin male C size connector C2947A 10 meter parallel cable C6518A HP USB 2 0 printer cable a b 2 meter 6 feet Part numbers 2 79 Part Part number Type size Media Q6541A HP Color Laser Soft Gloss Presentation Paper letter 200 sheets Q6542A HP Professional 120 Soft Gloss Laser Paper A4 200 sheets Q1298A HP LaserJet Tough Paper letter Q1298B HP Superior 165 Satin Matt Laser Paper A4 HPU1132 HP Premium Choice LaserJet Paper letter CHP410 HP Premium Choice LaserJet Paper A4 HPJ1124 HP LaserJet Paper letter CHP310 HP LaserJet Paper A4 Q2413A HP Premium Cover Paper letter 100 sheets Q6545A HP Laser Gloss Photo Image Paper letter Q6547A HP Professional 120 Glossy Laser Paper A4 Q6607A HP Color Laser Glossy Photo Paper letter 200 sheets Q6614A HP Photo 220 Glossy Laser Paper A4
181. essory connections and bidirectional parallel cable interface IEEE 1284 C compliant are standard e Memory 160 megabytes MB of memory 128 MB of dual data rate DDR synchronous dynamic random access memory SDRAM 32 MB of memory on the formatter board and one open dual inline memory module DIMM slot EA NOTE To allow memory expansion the printer has an available 200 pin small outline dual inline memory module SODIMM slot that accepts 128 or 256 MB RAM The printer can support up to 544 MB of memory 512 MB of memory in SODIMMs plus 32 MB additional memory on the formatter board An optional hard disk drive is also available HP Color LaserJet 4700n product number Q7492A 4 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW ENWW The HP Color LaserJet 4700n printer includes the features of the 4700 plus the HP Jetdirect embedded print server RJ 45 port for network connectivity HP Color LaserJet 4700dn product number Q7493A The HP Color LaserJet 4700dn printer includes the features of the 4700n plus a duplexer for automatic two sided printing and an additional 128 MB of memory for a total of 288 MB of memory 256 MB of DDR SDRAM and 32 MB of memory on the formatter board Printer configurations 5 HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn product number Q7494A The HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn includes all the features of the 4700dn two additional 500 sheet paper feeders Trays 3 and 4 and a printer stand HP Color LaserJet 4700ph
182. est PJL encountered a request for a personality that did not exist in the printer The job is aborted and no pages will be printed A storage device is being cleaned Do not turn the printer off When the process is complete the printer will automatically restart A cleaning page is being processed This message is displayed while the event log is cleared The printer will exit the MENUS once the event log has been cleared The printer jammed or detected misplaced paper when turned on The printer is attempting to eject jammed pages automatically The top cover needs to be closed The top cover of the printer is open 3 Reseat the printer on the 500 sheet input tray 4 Turn the printer on after reseating the 500 sheet input tray No action necessary No action necessary 1 Turn the printer off 2 Remove the card from the slot indicated and replace with a new card No action necessary No action necessary 1 Press for detailed information 2 Press and gt to step through the instructions 3 Reprint using the correct driver for the device No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary Close front covers EA NOTE This message might also appear if the fuser is missing or incorrectly installed Ensure that the fuser is correctly installed Close the top cover 194 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message D
183. et the selection Press Menu Replace supplies The printer allows three options for handling the printer when a color cartridge is low and should be replaced STOP AT OUT is the default value e STOP AT LOW pauses printing until the color supply is replaced The control panel displays a warning that the supply is low and should be replaced e STOPAT OUT allows the printer to continue printing until the color supply is exhausted The control panel displays a warning that the supply is out and should be replaced e OVERRIDE AT OUT allows printing to continue when a color supply is out but displays a warning that override is in use and that the supply must be replaced EA NOTE Using the Override mode may result in unsatisfactory print quality HP recommends replacing the supply when the REPLACE SUPPLY message is displayed HP Supplies Premium Protection Warranty coverage ends when a supply is used in Override mode ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 73 Setting replace supplies response 1 e pP n FF a p N Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight REPLACE SUPPLIES Press v to select REPLACE SUPPLIES Press a or v to select the appropriate setting Press v to set the selection Press Menu Order at This menu option allows
184. evice The device status page shows print cartridge information Managing print cartridges 163 Changing print cartridges When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life the control panel displays a message recommending that you order a replacement The printer can continue to print using the current print cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the cartridge The printer uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color black K magenta M cyan C and yellow Y Replace a print cartridge when the printer control panel displays a REPLACE lt COLOR gt CARTRIDGE message The control panel display will also indicate the color that should be replaced if a genuine HP cartridge is currently installed Replacing a print cartridge A CAUTION If toner gets on clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric EA NOTE For information about recycling used print cartridges see HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies Web site at http www hp com go recycle To replace the print cartridge 1 Lift the top cover of the printer CAUTION The fuser might be hot 164 Chapter7 Maintenance ENWW 2 Pull down the front cover and transfer unit CAUTION Do not place any item on the transfer unit while it is open If the transfer uni
185. f print cartridges status or device attendance messages are pending at the display No action necessary The printer is in a special diagnostics mode Ready Diagnostics mode To exit press Stop Press the Stop key to exit the special diagnostics mode OR No action is necessary The printer is online and ready Ready IP Address Receiving No action necessary Do not turn the printer off until the printer upgrade REINSERT DUPLEXER A firmware upgrade is in progress returns to Ready Press w to see step by step information REMOVE ALL The duplexer has been removed The printer is executing a component test and PRINT CARTRIDGES To exit press Stop the component selected is Belt Only Remove all print cartridges ENWW Control panel messages 203 Control panel message Description Recommended action Remove at least one print cartridge To exit press Stop REPLACE lt COLOR gt CARTRIDGE The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges alternates with To continue press v The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges REPLACE FUSER KIT For help press REPLACE FUSER KIT For help press alternates with REPLACE FUSER KIT To continue press v The printer is executing a disable cartridge Remove one print cartridge check or component test where the component selected is the cartridge motor The i
186. f with your other household waste Instead it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS can be obtained by contacting the HP LaserJet Supplies Web site at http Awww hp com hpinfo community environment productinfo safety htm For more information On HP s environmental programs including e Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products e HP s commitment to the environment e HP s environmental management system e HP s end of life product return and recycling program e Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS See http www hp com go environment or http www hp com hpinfo community environment Environmental product stewardship program 299 Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Manufact
187. figuration ENWW Disabling IPX SPX EA NOTE Do not disable this protocol if Windows 95 98 Windows NT Me 2000 and XP users will be printing to the printer using direct mode IPX SPX Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight I O Press v to select I O Press to highlight the JETDIRECT menu Press v to select the JETDIRECT menu Press to highlight IPX SPX P nN Sa ee YY CP Press v to select IPX SPX Press to highlight ENABLE Press v to select ENABLE N Press to highlight ON or OFF mN Press v to select ON or OFF 14 Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state Disabling DLC LLC 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight I O Press v to select I O Press to highlight the JETDIRECT menu Press v to select the JETDIRECT menu Press to highlight DLC LLC P At YS PDP Press v to select DLC LLC Press to highlight ENABLE Press v to select ENABLE N Press to highlight ON or OFF ENWW Network configuration 84 13 14 Press v to select ON or OFF Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state Disabling AppleTalk 1 rs rr 2 Pf e A ek ek P P P Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE
188. ftware application specify the source tray the paper size and the paper type Send the job to the printer If the tray needs to be configured the LOAD TRAY X message appears Load the tray with the correct paper When the tray is closed the TRAY X SIZE appears If the highlighted size is not correct press w or a to highlight the correct size Press v to select the correct size A Setting saved message appears and then a prompt appears to configure the paper type If the highlighted paper type is not correct press w or a to highlight the desired paper type Press v to select the paper type A Setting saved message appears and then the current type and size settings are displayed Configuring trays using the paper handling menu You can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the printer Use the PAPER HANDLING menu to configure the trays as follows Configuring the paper size 1 ee Se E PS Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight PAPER HANDLING Press v to select PAPER HANDLING Press to highlight TRAY lt N gt SIZE N represents the number of the tray you are configuring Press v to select TRAY lt N gt SIZE Press v or a to highlight the correct size Press v to select the correct size Configuring the paper type 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight PAPER HANDLING Press v to select PAPER HANDLING Press to highlight TRAY lt N
189. g RAM disk behavior You can change this behavior at any time by following these steps 1 Se OSS eS p Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight RAM DISK Press v to select RAM DISK Press a or w to select AUTO or OFF Press v to set the selection Press Menu Language On some products the option to set the default language appears when the printer is first initialized Use the a or arrow to scroll through the available options When the desired language is highlighted press the v to set the default language The default language is ENGLISH You may also change the language at any time by following these steps Selecting the language 1 P m Por PA ry N Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight LANGUAGE Press v to select LANGUAGE Press a or to select the appropriate language Press v to set the selection Press Menu 76 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW ENWW Selecting the language if the display is in a language you do not understand 1 2 3 4 5 Turn the printer power off Hold down the v key while turning the printer power on until all three lights stay on Press v a
190. g page for more information Select PROCESS CLEANING PAGE to process the cleaning page See Using the cleaning page for more information System setup menu The system setup menu allows you to make changes to general printer configuration default settings such as sleep mode printer personality language and jam recovery 56 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW See Changing printer control panel configuration settings for more information Menu item Values Description DATE TIME JOB STORAGE LIMIT JOB HELD TIMEOUT SHOW ADDRESS RESTRICT COLOR USE COLOR BLACK MIX TRAY BEHAVIOR DATE DATE FORMAT TIME TIME FORMAT 1 100 OFF 1 HOUR 4 HOURS 1 DAY 1 WEEK AUTO OFF DISABLE COLOR ENABLE COLOR COLOR IF ALLOWED AUTO MOSTLY COLOR PAGES MOSTLY BLACK PAGES USE REQUESTED TRAY MANUALLY FEED PROMPT PS DEFER MEDIA SIZE TYPE PROMPT USE ANOTHER TRAY Allows you to set various configurations for the date format when setting the date and select a 12 hour or 24 hour clock when setting time Sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs stored on the hard disk at the printer The default is 32 Sets the period of time that the system keeps files in job storage before deleting them from the queue The default is OFF This item determines whether the printer s IP address is shown on the display with the Ready message If more than one EIO card is installed the IP address of
191. g the stapler stacker e Special printing situations e Job storage features e Managing memory ENWW Controlling print jobs 92 In the Microsoft Windows operating system three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull paper when you send a print job The Source Type and Size settings appear in the Page Setup Print or Print Properties dialog boxes in most software programs If you do not change these settings the printer automatically selects a tray using the default printer settings Source Printing by Source means that you choose a specific tray from which you want the printer to pull paper The printer tries to print from this tray no matter what type or size is loaded If you choose a tray that is configured for a type or size that does not match your print job the printer does not print automatically Instead it waits for you to load the tray you chose with the type or size of print media for your print job If you load the tray the printer begins printing If you press v the printer displays options to print from another tray Type and size Printing by Type or Size means that you want the printer to pull paper or print media from the appropriate tray loaded with the correct type and size Selecting media by type rather than source is similar to locking out trays and helps protect special media from accidental use For example if a tray is configured for letterhead and you specify the driver to print on plain pap
192. gain Press a or to scroll through the available languages Press v to save the desired language as the new default Changing printer control panel configuration settings 7 Using the printer control panel in shared environments Because your printer is shared with other users adhere to the following guidelines to ensure successful printer operation e Consult your system administrator before making changes to control panel settings Changing control panel settings could affect other print jobs e Coordinate with other users before changing the default printer font or downloading soft fonts Coordinating these operations conserves memory and avoids unexpected printer output e Be aware that switching printer personalities such as Emulated PostScript or PCL affects the printed output of other users EA NOTE Your network operating system may automatically protect each user s print job from the effects of other print jobs Consult your system administrator for more information 78 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW 3 IO configuration This chapter describes how to configure certain network parameters on the printer The following topics are covered e Network configuration e Parallel configuration e USB configuration e Auxiliary connection configuration e HP Jetdirect print servers e Wireless printing ENWW 19 Network configuration You might need to configure certain network parameters on the printer You can config
193. h computers Reselect the control panel settings and then press w An asterisk should appear to the right of the setting Buffered data exists in the printer Press to print the buffered data using current control panel settings and activate the new control panel settings Consult the network administrator to coordinate changes to printer control panel settings Selecting optional trays Table 8 16 Unable to select optional trays Cause and solution Cause Solution The optional trays do not appear as an option on the configuration page or on the control panel The optional trays do not appear as available in the printer driver The optional trays are displayed as available only if they are installed Verify that the trays are correctly installed Verify that the printer driver configuration recognizes the optional tray For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers 238 Chapter8 Problem solving Incorrect printer output Incorrect fonts Table 8 17 Incorrect fonts are printed Cause and solution Cause Solution The font has not been correctly selected in the software Re select the font in the software application application The font is not available to the printer Download the font to the printer or use another font In Windows the driver does this automatically The correct printer driver is not selected Select the correct printer drive
194. h product number Q7495A ccccccceecceecc cece eeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeees 6 FICS Te SS reaa A eciect stances oan e a E E EE AEA E T VAK A ONG saara E E E E E E E E 10 Printer SONWANE raisen anana e e a a E E A a EERE 12 I anera iiien E E A eueeeaees 12 Software features aoe tucetscete tpn sete alrartaciecttaiameah ene eeneitetes me ee aise ann cenaeigeneecereeseeusosdaantemetede 12 Driver Autoconfiguration ccc cecccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeseeeesseeeesaeeeesaeeesaeeeesaaes 12 Upda 0 cane ene ne een E E eee eee eee mer eee 12 HP Driver PrecConfiguration cccccssceceseeceeeeceseeceeeeecseeceeeeceusessueessaeesneeesees 12 Installing the printing system software cccceecceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeseesseeeeaaeeeesass 13 Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections 13 Installing Windows printing system software for networks cccceeeee seen eee 14 Setting up a Windows computer to use the network printer with Windows SEUNG e te stoas vetomen EE E hes asen saaeessanesemenceacnoteumnatnaeas 15 Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been CON CU rss a ene erwin E E E cosa nceieussenscsanecenanetes 15 Uninstalling the software ccccccccscccceseecceeeeecseeeeceeaeeeceueeeceaseesseaseeseageessneecseueeessaeesssaeees 15 Removing software from Windows operating systems cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 Sof
195. handling menu allows you to configure input trays by size and type It is important to correctly configure the trays with this menu before you print for the first time EA NOTE If you have used other HP LaserJet printer models you might be accustomed to configuring Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode On HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers setting Tray 1 size and type to ANY SIZE is equivalent to First mode Setting size or type for Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY SIZE is equivalent to Cassette mode Menu item Value Description TRAY 1 SIZE A list of available sizes appears Allows you to configure the media size for Tray 1 The default is ANY SIZE See Supported media weights and sizes for a complete list of available sizes TRAY 1 TYPE A list of available types appears Allows you to configure the media type for Tray 1 The default is ANY TYPE See Supported media weights and sizes for a complete list of available types TRAY lt N gt SIZE A list of available sizes appears Allows you to configure the media size for Trays 2 3 4 5 or 6 The default is Letter N 2 3 4 5 or 6 The media size is detected by the guides in the tray See Supported media weights and sizes for a complete list of available sizes TRAY lt N gt TYPE A list of available types appears Allows you to configure the media type for Trays 2 3 4 5 or 6 The default is PLAIN N 2 3 4 5 or 6 See Supported media weights and sizes for a
196. hat you are using or in the operating system A CAUTION Use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or in the operating system e Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects such as sepia tones This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output You can download custom profiles from www hp com Edge Control The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered Edge control has three components adaptive halftoning Resolution Enhancement Technology REt and trapping Adaptive halftoning increases the edge sharpness Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color alignment by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects The color REt option smooths the edges EA NOTE Ifyou notice white gaps between objects or if you notice areas that have a slight shadow of cyan magenta or yellow at the edge choose an edge control setting that increases the trapping level Four levels of edge control are available e Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on e Normal is the default trapping setting Trapping is at a medium level Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on e Light sets trapping at a minimal level Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on e Off
197. he operation and location requirements of the printer are met Make sure to use supported media Make sure that the media you are using does not have any wrinkles or dents from handling and that the media is not contaminated with visible fingerprints or other foreign substances Make sure that the media type and size for the tray are set correctly in the control panel for the media that you are using Calibrate the printer Print the Print Quality Troubleshooting Pages see Print quality troubleshooting and follow the diagnostic procedure listed on the first page to help isolate the defect to a particular component Specks or stray toner Make sure that the operation and location requirements of the printer are met Make sure to use supported media Make sure that the media type and size for the tray are set correctly in the control panel for the media that you are using Calibrate the printer Print the Print Quality Troubleshooting Pages see Print quality troubleshooting and follow the diagnostic procedure listed on the ENWW Print quality troubleshooting 257 wrinkles or dents from handling and that the media is not contaminated with visible fingerprints or other foreign substances Make sure that the following supplies are seated correctly e fuser e transfer belt Inspect the jam areas and remove any undetected jammed or torn media Skewed stretc
198. he display until the printer finishes printing the event log The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log ENWW Printer information pages 145 Using the embedded Web server EA NOTE When the printer is directly connected to a computer use the HP Easy Printer Care Software to view the printer status When the printer is directly connected to a computer the embedded Web server is supported for Windows 98 and later When the printer is connected to the network the embedded Web server is automatically available You can access the embedded Web server from Windows 98 and later or through the Apple Safari browser The embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel Below are examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server e View printer control status information e Set the type of paper loaded in each tray e Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones e View and change tray configurations e View and change the printer control panel menu configuration e View and print internal pages e Receive notification of printer and supplies events e View and change network configuration e Restrict access to color printing See http Awww hp com go coloraccess for setup instructions To use the embedded Web server you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or la
199. hed or off center page Make sure that the operation and location requirements of the printer are met Make sure to use supported media Make sure that the media is loaded correctly For problems with page skew turn over the stack of media and rotate the stack 180 degrees Make sure that the following supplies are seated correctly e fuser e transfer belt Inspect the jam areas and remove any undetected jammed or torn media first page to help isolate the defect to a particular component 258 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW A Working with memory and print server cards ENWW 259 Printer memory and fonts The printer has two 200 pin DDR SDRAM slots One slot is available for adding memory to the printer DDR SDRAM memory is available in 128 and 256 MB modules EA NOTE Memory specification HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers use 200 pin small outline dual inline memory modules SODIMM that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM The printer also has three flash memory card slots for printer firmware fonts and other solutions e _ The first flash memory card is reserved for printer firmware EA NOTE Use the first flash memory card slot for firmware only The slot is marked Firmware g Slot e The two additional flash memory card slots enable the user to add fonts and third party solutions such as signatures and personalities The slots are marked Slot 2 and Slot 3 For more information abou
200. his setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output You can download custom profiles from www hp com Automatic or manual color adjustment The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment halftones and edge enhancements that are used for each element in a document For more information see your printer driver online Help Ex NOTE Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing most color documents 156 Chapter6 Color ENWW ENWW The Manual color adjustment option allows you to adjust the neutral gray color treatment halftones and edge enhancements for text graphics and photographs To access the Manual color options from the Color tab select Manual then Settings Manual color options You can manually adjust color options for Edge Control Halftones and Neutral Grays Edge Control The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered Edge control has three components adaptive halftoning REt and trapping Adaptive halftoning increases the edge sharpness Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color alignment by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects The color REt option smoothes the edges B NOTE Ifyou notice white gaps between objects or if you notice areas that have a slight shadow of cyan magenta or yellow at the edge choose an edge control setting that increases the trapping level
201. hoto Paper and soft glossy papers designed for use in HP color laser printers HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results If other types of glossy media are used print quality could be compromised Printing on special media 109 Colored paper e Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper e Pigments used in colored media must be able to withstand the printer s fusing temperature of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second without deterioration e The printer creates colors by printing patterns of dots overlaying and varying their spacing to produce various colors Varying the shade or color of the paper will affect the shades of the printed colors Envelopes EA NOTE Envelopes can be printed only from Tray 1 Set the tray s media size to the specific envelope size See Printing envelopes from Tray 1 Adhering to the following guidelines will help ensure proper printing on envelopes and help prevent printer jams e Do not load more than 20 envelopes into Tray 1 e The weight rating of envelopes should not exceed 90 g m 24 Ib bond e Envelopes should be flat e Do not use envelopes with windows or clasps e Envelopes must not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged e Envelopes with peel off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat and pressures of the printer s fusing process e Envelopes should be loaded face down and with the postage end f
202. hp com Q749 1 9095 3
203. ia type for the tray Click Apply Now Changing network settings Change the network internet protocol IP settings from the computer You also can open the embedded Web server to change additional settings For more information about the embedded Web server see Using the embedded Web server 1 2 3 4 Open the HP Printer Utility In the Configuration Settings list select IP Settings Change any of the settings in the following pop up menus or fields e Configuration e Host Name e IP Address e Subnet Mask e Default Gateway If you want to change more settings in the embedded Web server click Additonal Network Settings The embedded Web server opens with the Networking tab selected Click Apply Now Opening the embedded Web server Open the embedded Web server through the HP Printer Utility For more information about the embedded Web server see Using the embedded Web server 1 2 3 Open the HP Printer Utility In the Configuration Settings list select Additional Settings Click Open Embedded Web Server Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 31 32 Setting up e mail alerts Set up e mail messages that alert you to certain events that occur with the printer such as a low toner level in a print cartridge 1 2 3 4 Open the HP Printer Utility In the Configuration Settings list select E mail Alerts Click the Server tab and in the SMTP server box type the server name Click the
204. ice menu 59 Menu item Values Description STAPLES OUT OFFSET CONTINUE STOP ENABLED DISABLED The STAPLES OUT menu defines the action that the stapler stacker takes when it runs out of staples It can instruct the printer to stop and wait until the stapler cartridge is replaced or it can allow printing to continue without stapling If the device is configured to stop when the cartridge is empty up to two jobs might be processed without stapling before the printer stops The default is CONTINUE The OFFSET menu stipulates whether the job should be offset When this configuration is set at the control panel it is applied to all subsequent jobs It cannot be applied on a job by job basis The default is ENABLED Only supported paper sizes can be offset I O menu This menu allows you to configure the printer s I O options See Network configuration Menu item Values Description 1 0 TIMEOUT 15 SECONDS Allows you to set the printer I O timeout in seconds Range 5 300 PARALLEL INPUT HIGH SPEED Allows you to select the speed at which the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU ADVANCED FUNCTIONS The values may vary Possible values may include TCP IP IPX SPX APPLETALK DLC LLC SECURE WEB DIAGNOSTICS RESET SECURITY LINK SPEED parallel port communicates with the host and to enable or disable the bi directional parallel communication The default for HIGH SPEED is YES The default for ADVA
205. idges together and use the single pre paid and pre addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package For more information in the U S call 1 800 340 2445 or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies Web site at http Awww hp com go recycle e Non U S recycling returns Non U S customers should visit the http Awww hp com go recycle Web site for further information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Recycled paper This product is capable of using recycled papers according to EN 12281 2002 HP recommends the use of recycled papers that contain not more than 5 ground wood such as HP Office Recycled paper Material restrictions This HP product contains a battery that may require special handling at end of life The battery contained in this product includes e Type Carbon monofluoride lithium battery e Weight 0 8 grams Location Formatter board User removable No Batterij niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA X THRE This product does not contain added mercury For recycling information contact htip www hp com go recycle contact your local authorities or go to the Electronics Industries Alliance Web site at http www eiae org 298 AppendixE Regulatory information ENWW ENWW Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed o
206. ied in step 1 3 Load the media for the remaining pages of the document into another tray You can also print on different media by using the printer control panel or printer driver to set the types of media that are loaded in the trays and then selecting the first and remaining pages by media type Printing a blank back cover Use the following procedure to print a blank back cover You can also select an alternate paper source or print on a different media type than the rest of the document 1 On the printer driver s Paper tab select Use different paper then from the drop down list select Back Cover check Add a blank back cover and then click OK 2 For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers You can also select an alternate paper source or print a blank back cover on a different media type than the rest of the document If desired select a different source and type from the drop down lists Printing on custom size media The printer supports single sided printing on custom size media Tray 1 supports media sizes from 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 inches to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x14 inches Tray 2 and the optional 500 sheet trays support media sizes from 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 inches A5 size to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches When printing on custom size media if Tray 1 is configured in the printer control panel as TRAY X TYPE ANY TYPE and TRAY X SIZE ANY SIZE the printer will print on whatever medi
207. ing an HP Jetdirect print server card 273 3 Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer ZZZZ7 TITTY I J 4 Locate an open EIO slot Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot and then remove the cover You will not need these screws and the cover again They can be discarded 5 7 IIIZ IIIN CESS K L p ez L asmane 2 4 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards ENWW 6 Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card T 8 Reconnect the power cable and turn the printer on ENWW Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card 275 9 Print a configuration page see Configuration page In addition to a printer configuration page and a Supplies Status page an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print If the printer does not print uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot 10 Perform one of these steps e Choose the correct port See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions e Run the printer installation software again choosing the network installation this time 2 6 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards ENWW B Supplies and accessories To order supplies in the US contac
208. ing but distinguishes between transparencies Transparency mode and paper Normal mode e This is the fastest mode and is useful for high volume printing in Normal mode 96 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW Configuring input trays ENWW The printer allows you to configure input trays by type and size You can load different media in the printer s input trays and then request media by type or size using the control panel E NOTE If you have used other HP LaserJet printer models you might be accustomed to configuring Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode On HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers setting Tray 1 size and type to ANY SIZE is equivalent to First mode Setting size or type for Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY SIZE is equivalent to Cassette mode NOTE Ifyou are duplex printing be sure that the media loaded meets the specifications for duplex printing See Supported media weights and sizes NOTE The instructions below are to configure the trays at the printer control panel You can also configure the trays from your computer by accessing the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server Configuring trays when the printer gives a prompt In the following situations the printer automatically prompts you to configure the tray for type and size e When you load paper into the tray e When you specify a particular tray or media type for a print job through the printer driver or a software application and the tray is
209. ing optional WAY So scinacssccteAstsesaxanatccrnassancaeyaannny dadvaonaanessan uletaesauuiene nesmnty dentin entesans 238 WACOMECT oner OULOUN atc 3cicta dea lis sath sents E 239 WAC ORPE CU TOMES anona tee tet wate taee ate aau No a a a e sande N 239 VINO SS es arcsec dic dete eas tsarlccte ott eect is atta E E A had laser tna 239 O WOK ssc 0c dia eaten ea le net are sais weenie euavi tee caunde stench EA 239 COLD OE CIN ONS rrean A eE E E E eE SEIE e ES NO de ccs dace ecn indy 239 Partial printout edee a a haa cada 240 Guidelines for printing with different fonts ccceecccceeeeeceeeeeeseeceeaeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeneeees 240 Software application problems cccccccccseccceeccceceeceeeccececcececsecceececaeeeeaeeseseesuseesaneesseesaeeeneeeesaees 241 System selection through software cccccceeccecseeceeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeeaeeees 241 Font selection from software x 2 icdosstosen che eacdse deeds anata egos tees staneciaed does teasaeos acdc 241 Color Selection from SOPWALE ccccccceeccceeecceeeecseeceeueessaeeecaueeceuseesueeessaeessaeeesueesseetens 241 Optional trays and duplexer recognition cccceececseeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseueeeseeeesseeeeseeeesaeeeeaeess 241 ENWW Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems ccccccceececeeeceeceeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseueeseeeesees 243 Solving problems with Mac OS 9 X cecccccccecseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeee
210. inter information ENWW Menu item PRINT MENU MAP PRINT CONFIGURATION PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE SUPPLIES STATUS PRINT USAGE PAGE PRINT DEMO PRINT RGB SAMPLES PRINT CMYK SAMPLES PRINT FILE DIRECTORY PRINT PCL FONT LIST PRINT PS FONT LIST Description Prints the control panel menu map which shows the layout and current settings of the control panel menu items See Printer information pages Prints the printer configuration page Prints the estimated remaining life for the supplies reports statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed print cartridge manufacture date serial number page counts and maintenance information Displays the status of the print cartridges fuser kit and transfer kit in a scrollable list Prints a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer lists whether they were simplex duplex monochrome or color and reports the page count Prints a demonstration page Prints color samples for different RGB values The samples act as a guide for color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Prints color samples for different CMYK values The samples act as a guide for color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Prints the name and directory of files stored in the printer on an optional hard disk Prints the available PCL fonts Prints the available PS emulated PostScript fonts Information menu 51 Paper handling menu The paper
211. inting envelopes from Tray T sind inanoncadvscnantenndeesenaeuectasutenaseoucudiaueducuedaacasddaceadacsacemianunenes 101 Loading envelopes into Tray 1 cccecccseeceseeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeseeeseueeseeesaaes 101 Printing GNVGIOD CS serirosin a 102 Printing from Tray 2 or the optional trays cccceccccseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeas 102 Loading detectable standard sized media into Tray 2 and optional trays cccce 103 Loading undetectable standard sized media into Tray 2 and optional trays 06 105 ENWW viii ENWW Loading custom sized media into Tray 2 and optional trays cccccceccseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeaees 107 PANUNG ON SOC ClANITI COLA rss duvansauwes aceundeceeti eacevaneciciscivwclouaneiaate man iemsessicereneuiecs 109 TRANS DANO CIS S iis otra case ge oss asavae a a eee dace nneaee esas tase ES 109 DIOSSY ADEN cheisheltasestcastcsun A a E A aeavieeee 109 Colored os 8 arnis ae ee ee Aree NRSC T E E 110 ETIVCIOD CS sat tc tutes nleciacths a aa a cel joskonds eadeaaieeaeieiees 110 EE 8 ot ae tae ee ec ee ae a ee ee Se eee ee ee ee a one 110 Bore WAY DIDE Gane en nn nee eee ure ee ree ee ee ee ae ene nee 110 HP LaserJet Tough paper riricorsreioa heres erecta leet oe Serer ad eee yee 111 Preprinted forms and letterhead cccccccccsecccsecceeceseeeeceeeeseeeesaeecegeesaeessueesaeeeseeesaneeaes 111 RECVOIE DADO edirecsca ces euch tes rtica
212. ion the installer presents Driver Autoconfiguration as an installable component by default for a Typical Installation and for a Custom Installation Update Now If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer since installation the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication Click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver EA NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts HP Driver Preconfiguration HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that allows HP software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments Using HP Driver 12 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW ENWW Preconfiguration information technology IT administrators can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment For more information see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide which is available at htip www hp com support clj4700 Installing the printing system software The following sections contain instructions for installing the printing system software The printer comes with printing system software and printer drivers on a CD ROM The printing system software on the
213. ion settings Run another peripheral connected to this port to verify that the port is working properly Use the appropriate utility to name the printer on the network For Macintosh OS 9 x computers select the printer from within the Chooser For Macintosh OS 10 2 and later open the Print Center Application select the connection type and then select the printer Printer not receiving data Table 8 13 Printer is on but is not receiving data Cause and solution Cause Solution The printer s Ready indicator light is not lit The top cover is not closed properly A printer message other than Ready appears on the printer control panel The interface cable is not correct for this configuration The interface cable is not securely connected to both the printer and the computer The printer is not configured correctly The interface configurations on the printer s configuration page do not match the configurations on the host computer The computer is not working properly The computer port that the printer is connected to is not configured or is not working properly The printer has not been correctly named for the network or Macintosh computer Press Stop to return the printer to the Ready state Close the top cover firmly See Control panel messages Select the correct interface cable for your configuration See Parallel configuration HP Jetdirect print servers or USB Disconnect and reconn
214. iption service for driver updates Visit http www hp com go mac connect for products designed specifically for the Macintosh user IV HP customer care ENWW Table of contents 1 Printer basics Quick access to printer information cccccecceeccceeeceeeeceeeceeeeceeeceucecaeeesaeecsaeessueesausesaueeseueesaaeesansesens 2 World Wide Web links cccceccssccceeeceeeceseceseecueeecscecaueceeeceecaeecauecsueecueecaeeseueseueesueesaeesees 2 Yser gulde INKS csencomce sarin a E E A E 2 Where to look for more information cece cece eececececeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeese cess eeseeeseeeesaeesseeseeeeeeeas 2 Setting UP the printer 0 0 0 cece cecsececeeeeceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeseceeseueesaeeeseesseeeeseeessaees 2 Using the printer ccccccccsscccssseceececeececeecesseeseeeaseesaseesaseeseeeeseeeeeessseeseeeesagss 3 Printer configurations sacssecseinsads stanton csherdtandeceace ste trecseesensearechdiecsuenane yen deaicaoss rtt arrn trr n rrna rnrn n rren renane ennnen 4 HP Color LaserJet 4700 product number Q7491A cccccccecceeceeeeeseeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeens 4 HP Color LaserJet 4700n product number Q7492A nnannnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnesrnnnsnrrnrnrnsnrnsnnnene 4 HP Color LaserJet 4700dn product number Q7493A ccceccccseeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaaeeeens 5 HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn product number Q7494A 00 cccceccccsecceeseeeecseeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeenaeees 6 HP Color LaserJet 4700p
215. is printer EA NOTE PANTONE Colors generated may not match PANTONE identified standards Consult i current PANTONE Publications for accurate color PANTONE and other Pantone Inc trademarks are the property of Pantone Inc Pantone Inc 2000 Sample book color matching The process for matching printer output to preprinted sample books and standard color references is complex In general you can obtain a reasonably good match to a sample book if the inks used to create the sample book are cyan magenta yellow and black These are usually referred to as process color sample books Some sample books are created from spot colors Spot colors are specially created colorants Many of these spot colors are outside of the range of the printer Most spot color sample books have companion process sample books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color 154 Chapter6 Color ENWW ENWW Most process sample books will state which process standards were used to print the sample book In most cases they will be SWOP EURO or DIC To get optimal color matching to the process sample book select the corresponding ink emulation from the printer menu If you cannot identify the process standard use SWOP ink emulation Printing color samples To use the color samples select the color sample that is the closest match to the desired color Use the sample s color value in your application to describe the object you wish to match Colors may
216. ithout the need to become a color expert Printing in four colors CMYK Cyan magenta yellow and black CMYK are the inks used by a printing press The process is often called four color printing CMYK data files are typically used by and originate from graphic arts printing and publishing environments The printer will accept CMYK colors through the PS printer driver The printer color rendering of CMYK is designed to provide rich saturated colors for text and graphics CMYK ink set emulation PostScript only The printer color rendering of CMYK can be made to emulate several standard offset press ink sets In some situations the CMYK color values in an image or document might not be suited to the printer For example a document might be optimized for another printer For best results the CMYK values should be adapted to the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Select the appropriate color input profile from the printer driver e Default CMYK HP CMYK technology produces optimal printing results for most printing jobs e SWOP Specification for Web Offset Publications Common ink standard in the United States and other countries regions e Euroscale also known as Euro Standard Common ink standard in Europe and other countries regions e DIC Dainippon Ink and Chemical Common ink standard in Japan and other countries regions e Custom profile Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output for
217. izes Envelope printing error Table 8 8 Envelopes jam or will not feed in the printer Cause and solution Cause Solution Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray Only Tray 1can_ Load envelopes into Tray 1 feed envelopes Envelopes are curled or damaged Try using different envelopes Store envelopes in a controlled environment Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too Try using different envelopes Store envelopes in a controlled high environment Envelope orientation is incorrect Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly See Configuring input trays ENWW Media handling problems 233 234 Chapter 8 Table 8 8 Envelopes jam or will not feed in the printer continued Cause and solution Cause Solution This printer does not support the envelopes being used Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes See Supported media weights and sizes Configure Tray 1 size for envelopes Output quality Table 8 9 Output is curled or wrinkled Cause and solution Cause Solution Media does not meet the specifications for this printer Media is damaged or in poor condition Printer is operating in an excessively humid environment You are printing large solid filled areas Media used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed moisture Media has poorly cut edges The specific media type was not configured for the tray or selected in the software
218. jam access door Close the top cover and resend the job Close the stapler cartridge door Close the top cover and resend the job ENWW Control panel messages 20 7 Control panel message Description Recommended action STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES TOO MANY PAGES IN JOB TO STAPLE Transfer unit can be easily damaged alternates with For help press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges TRAY X EMPTY TYPE SIZE alternates with Ready TRAY X OPEN For help press alternates with Ready TRAY XX SIZE lt SIZE gt Setting saved TYPE MISMATCH TRAY XX TYPE For help press alternates with Ready Unable to mopy job alternates with Processing Fewer than 20 usable staples remain in the stapler cartridge The status light is solid green The job contains more than the specified number of sheets for the media type being used and cannot be stapled When the maximum number of sheets for a specific media type is reached the job is ejected and handled as a stacked job The cartridge is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer The specified tray is empty and the current job does not need this tray to print The specified tray is open or not closed completely The size selected from the menu has been saved The media type loaded in the tray does not match the media type configured for the tray The print job cannot be mo
219. ker printer e The LED light on the stapler stacker is off e Turn the printer off check all cable connections then turn the printer on e Ensure thatthe stapler stacker has been configured in the printer driver e Printa configuration page to verify that the device is configured properly e Ifthe printer still fails to recognize the stapler stacker contact http www hp com support clj4700 The printer has stopped printing e The output bin is full Remove some or all of the media in the bin e _ The stapler stacker is configured to stop when it is out of staples To continue printing replace the stapler 230 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Table 8 2 Resolving common stapler stacker issues continued Cause and solution Cause Solution cartridge For more information see Selecting the printer behavior at staples out The print media jams Check that you are using media that is supported for the printer For more information see Supported media weights Repeated jams occur and sizes EA NOTE Using media that is outside of HP specifications might cause problems that could require repair This repair is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements Incorrect page size Table 8 3 Printer feeds incorrect page size Cause and solution Cause Solution The correct size media is not loaded in the input tray Load the correct size media in the input tray The correct size me
220. l The number of quick copy print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set from the printer control panel This feature can be turned on or off from the driver 1 Press Menu to enter MENUS RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted Press v to select RETRIEVE JOB Press v to select your USER NAME 2 3 4 Press to highlight your USER NAME 5 6 Press to highlight a JOB NAME 7 Press v to select the JOB NAME PRINT is highlighted 138 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW 8 Press v to select PRINT 9 Press a or w to select the number of copies 10 Press v to print the job ENWW Job storage features 139 Managing memory This printer Supports up to 544 MB of memory 512 MB DDR plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board You can add additional memory by installing dual data rate DDR memory To allow for memory expansion the printer has two DDR slots which accept 128 or 256 MB of RAM each For information about installing memory see Working with memory and print server cards E NOTE Memory specification HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers use 200 pin small outline dual inline memory modules SODIMM that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM The printer features Memory Enhancement Technology MEt which automatically compresses page data to provide the most efficient use of the printers RAM The printer uses DDR SODIMM Extended data output EDO DIMMs are not supported 29 hse 4 ne sesh ga ea esd Lunn un eed cee
221. l automatically attempt to reprint jammed pages This is the default e OFF Printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages e On Printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages 210 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW EA NOTE During the recovery process the printer might reprint several good pages that were printed before the paper jam occurred Be sure to remove any duplicated pages To disable paper jam recovery 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY Press v to select JAM RECOVERY Press to highlight OFF gt N ea a pP p Press v to select OFF 10 Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state To improve print speed and increase memory resources you might want to disable paper jam recovery If paper jam recovery is disabled the pages involved in a jam will not be reprinted ENWW Paperjams 211 212 Chapter 8 Common causes of paper jams The following table lists common causes of paper jams and suggested solutions for resolving them Paper jams Cause and solution Cause Solution When the printer is first installed the protective insert does not eject properly Print media does not meet HP recommended media specifications A supply item is installed incorrectly causing repeated jams You are reloading paper that h
222. lick Print Document On 3 Select the target paper size to print on 4 To print the document on the target paper size without scaling it to fit make sure that the Scale to Fit option is not selected 5 Click OK The product is now set to print the document as you specified 114 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW ENWW Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver To set a custom paper size 1 2 3 4 on Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers On the Paper or Paper Quality tab click Custom On the Custom Paper Size window type the name of the custom paper size Type the paper size length and width If you type a size that is too small or too large the driver automatically adjusts the size to the minimum or maximum size that is allowed If necessary click the button to change the unit of measure between millimeters and inches Click Save Click Close The product is now set to print the document on the custom size paper that you selected The name that you saved appears in the paper size list for future use Using different paper covers Follow these instructions for printing a first page that is different from other pages in the print job o a gt amp N Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers On the Paper or Paper Quality tab select the appropriate paper for the first page of the print job Click Use Different Paper Covers In the list box click
223. lor LaserJet 4700 printer incorporates a new feature to skip calibration when appropriate thereby making the printer available more quickly For example if the printer is powered off and on quickly within 20 seconds calibration is not needed and will be skipped In this case the printer will reach the Ready state approximately one minute sooner While the printer is calibrating and cleaning the printer will pause printing for the amount of time it takes to complete the calibration or cleaning For most calibrations and cleaning the printer will not interrupt a print job but will wait for the job to complete before calibrating or cleaning 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY Press v to select PRINT QUALITY Press to highlight QUICK CALIBRATE NOW ae o oS SY N Press v to select QUICK CALIBRATE NOW OR To perform a full calibration use FULL CALIBRATE NOW instead of QUICK CALIBRATE NOW in steps 6 and 7 Repetitive defect ruler If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page use this ruler to identify the cause of the defect Place the top of the ruler at the first defect The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect indicates which component needs to be replaced ENWW Print quality troubleshooting 253 1 First occurrence of the defect the distance from the top of the page to the defect might
224. m gt e pP Press v to set the selection Press Menu Jam recovery This option allows you to configure the printer response to paper jams including how it handles the pages involved AUTO is the default value e AUTO the printer automatically turns jam recovery on when sufficient memory is available e OFF the printer will not reprint any page that was involved in a paper jam Since no memory is used to store the most recent pages performance may be optimal e ON the printer reprints any page involved in a paper jam Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed and this might cause overall printer performance to suffer Setting jam recovery response 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY Press v to select JAM RECOVERY Press a or to select the appropriate setting Se SS p e N Press v to set the selection pa Press Menu ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 15 RAM disk This option allows you to specify how the RAM disk is configured Options are AUTO and OFF When set to AUTO the printer determines the optimal RAM size based on the amount of available memory The message displays only in printer models that do not have a hard disk installed The default is AUTO Changin
225. me IP address or Rendezvous host name does not appear in the printer list in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Cause Solution The printer might not be ready The wrong connection type might be selected The wrong printer name IP address or Rendezvous host name is being used The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality Make sure that the cables are connected correctly the printer is on and the ready light is on If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub try connecting directly to the computer or use a different port Make sure that USB IP Printing or Rendezvous is selected depending on the type of connection that exists between the printer and the computer Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name IP address or Rendezvous host name Verify that the name IP address or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the printer name IP address or Rendezvous host name in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Replace the interface cable Make sure to use a high quality cable The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Cause Solution The printer might not be ready The printer software might not have been installed or was installed incorrectly The Postscript Printer Description PPD file is corrupt The printer might not be ready The interface
226. mity 300 demo page printing 144 Desktop Printer Utility troubleshooting 243 diagnostics menu 63 DIMMs dual inline memory modules installing 261 display brightness setting 71 double sided printing 122 123 125 driver autoconfiguration 12 drivers accessing 20 22 Help 20 Macintosh troubleshooting 245 presets 121 quick sets 113 selecting 20 duplex printing 116 117 Index 30 7 binding options 127 control panel settings 126 manual 127 duplex printing accessory loading 116 122 duplexing 116 122 E e mail alerts 147 embedded Web server checking toner level 163 description 17 ordering supplies 278 using 146 using to configure alerts 175 enlarging documents 114 envelopes jams 233 loading in Tray 1 101 printing 101 environmental features 8 EPS files troubleshooting 244 247 errors auto continue 73 event log printing 145 viewing 147 F FCC regulations 296 file directory page printing 145 first page blank 115 use different paper 115 first page use different paper 121 flash memory card installing 268 font list printing 145 fonts EPS files troubleshooting 244 247 Macintosh troubleshooting 244 G grayscale printing 156 159 308 Index H Help printer driver 20 host USB 86 HP customer care ili HP Easy Printer Care Software checking toner level 163 using 1 7 149 HP fraud hotline 162 HP Jetdirect print servers configuring 147 installing 273 HP OpenVMS drivers 19
227. n the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Duplex Mode 3 Select Enable Duplex Mode to activate the two sided printing mode and then click Apply Now Activating the Economode printing mode Use the Economode setting to conserve printer supplies 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Economode Toner Density 3 Select Turn Economode on and then click Apply Now ENWW Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 29 Changing the toner density Conserve print cartridge toner by changing the toner density level The lower toner density levels conserve the most toner 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Economode Toner Density 3 On the Toner Density popup menu select the toner density level and then click Apply Now Changing the resolution settings Change the resolution settings from the computer You also can change the Resolution Enhancement Technology REt setting 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Resolution 3 On the Resolution pop up menu select the resolution level and then click Apply Now EA NOTE To change the REt setting repeat step 3 in the REt Level pop up menu Locking or unlocking printer storage devices Manage access to printer storage devices from the computer 1 Open the HP Printer Utility 2 Inthe Configuration Settings list select Lock Resources
228. n the list the HP Easy Printer Care Software opens the Overview tab for that printer Device List tab information includes the following Clicking the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list opens the Find Other Printers window The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects other network printers so that you can add them to the Devices list and then monitor those printers from your computer Managing the printer ENWW 6 Color This chapter describes how the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer provides great color printing This chapter also describes ways to produce the best possible color prints The following topics are covered e Using color Color matching e Managing printer color options on Windows computers e Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers ENWW 151 Using color The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer offers great color printing as soon as you set up the printer It provides a combination of automatic color features to generate excellent color results for the general office user plus sophisticated tools for the professional who is experienced with color use The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer provides carefully designed and tested color tables to provide a smooth accurate color rendition of all printable colors HP ImageREt 3600 HP ImageREt 3600 print technology is a system of innovative technologies developed exclusively by HP to deliver superior print quality
229. nd gt to step through the instructions Control panel messages 185 Control panel message Description Recommended action 3 for more information see Clearing jams 4 Ifthe message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 13 XX YY JAM IN TOP There is a jam in the top cover area il Press for detailed information about clearing the jam COVER OR DUPLEX AREA 2 Press and to step through the For help press instructions 3 for more information see Clearing jams 4 Ifthe message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 _ 13 XX YY JAM INSIDE Paper is jammed in the duplexer Check the Press for detailed information about device for jammed paper clearing the jam DUPLEXER 2 Press and to step through the For help press instructions 3 for more information see Clearing jams 4 Ifthe message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 13 XX YY MULTIPLE There are multiple jams in the duplex path 1 Press for detailed information about This includes the top cover area clearing the jam JAMS IN DUPLEX PATH 2 Press and to step through the For help press instructions 3 for more information see Clearing jams 4 Ifthe message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700
230. ndetectable standard sized media sizes are not marked in the tray but are listed in the Size menu for the tray The following undetectable standard sized media is supported in the 500 sheet trays executive JIS 8 5 x 13 double Japan postcard and 16K CAUTION Do not print cardstock envelopes heavy or extra heavy paper or unsupported sizes of media from the 500 sheet trays Print on these types of media only from Tray 1 Do not overfill the input tray or open it while it is in use Doing so can cause paper jams 1 Remove the tray from the printer ENWW Configuring input trays 105 2 Adjust the rear media length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back of the tray to the length of the media being used 4 Load media into the tray face up EA NOTE For best performance load the tray completely full without splitting or fanning the ream of paper Splitting or fanning the ream might cause a multi feed problem which could result in a paper jam The capacity of the paper tray can vary For example if you are using 75 g m 20 Ib paper the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets If the media is heavier than 75 g m 20 Ib the tray will not hold a full ream and you must reduce the number of sheets accordingly Do not overfill the tray because the printer might not pick up the paper NOTE Ifthe tray is not properly adjusted the printer might display an error message or the media might jam NOTE If you
231. nel A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font PC 8 or PC 850 is recommended for line draw characters APPEND CR TO LF Select Yes to append a Carriage return to each line feed encountered in backward compatible PCL jobs pure text no job control Some environments such as UNIX indicate a new line using only the line feed control code This option allows you to append the required carriage return to each line feed SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES When generating your own PCL extra form feeds are included that would cause a blank page to be printed Select Yes for form feeds to be ignored if the page is blank The PCL5 MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING command selects an input tray by anumber that maps to the various available trays and feeders Print quality menu This menu allows you to adjust all aspects of print quality including calibration registration and color halftone settings Menu item Values Description ADJUST COLOR HIGHLIGHTS Allows you to modify the half tone settings for each color The default for each color is MIDTONES 0 SHADOWS RESTORE COLOR VALUES SET REGISTRATION PRINT TEST PAGE Shifts the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and left to right You can also align the image 54 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Menu item Values Description AUTO SENSE MODE PRINT MODES OPTIMIZE SOURCE ADJUST TRAY N TRAY 1 SENSING TRAY 2 N SENSING
232. nformation about the printing system software components refer to the g readme file on the Web at http www hp com support clj4700 For information about installing the printer software view the Install Notes on the CD ROM included with the printer This section summarizes the software included on the CD ROM The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators operating in the following operating environments Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows Me Microsoft Windows 2000 XP 32 bit and Server 2003 32 bit e Apple Mac OS 9 1 and 9 2 and Mac OS X v10 2 8 and v10 3 EA NOTE For alist of the network environments supported by the network administrator software components see Network configuration NOTE Foralistof printer drivers updated HP printer software and product support information go to http www hp com support clj4700 Software Software features Automatic Configuration Update Now and Preconfiguration features are available with the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer Driver Autoconfiguration The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for Windows 2000 and Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for printer accessories at the time of installation Some accessories that Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit optional paper trays and dual inline memory modules DIMMs If the environment supports bidirectional communicat
233. ng ENWW Print quality troubleshooting ENWW When occasional print quality problems occur use the information in this section to help solve the problem Print quality problems associated with media Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate media e Use paper that meets HP paper specifications See Supported media weights and sizes e The surface of the media is too smooth Use media that meets HP paper specifications See Supported media weights and sizes e The print driver setting might be incorrect Be sure that you have selected the correct driver setting for the paper that you are using e The print mode might be set incorrectly or the paper might not meet recommended specifications For more information see Supported media weights and sizes e The transparencies you are using are not designed for proper toner adhesion Use only transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet printers e The moisture content of the paper is uneven too high or too low Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper e Some areas of the paper reject toner Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper e The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper Use a smoother xerographic paper If this solves your problem consult with the printer of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets the specifications for this printer See Supported media weights and sizes e The p
234. ng a selection of alternate media to use for the print job RAM disk settings have been changed before the printer automatically restarts or external device modes have changed or the printer is coming out of the diagnostics mode and will automatically restart The printer is waiting for Tray 2 or an optional tray to lift The printer is coming out of sleep mode Printing will continue as soon as warmup is completed Control panel message Recommended action Install additional memory in the printer or install a disk drive into the printer If a disk drive is installed delete previously stored print jobs 1 View tray configurations type and size using and v 2 Press to select a tray to use 3 Toreturn to the previous message press Back No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary Control panel messages 209 Paper jams Use this illustration to troubleshoot paper jams in the printer For instructions on clearing paper jams see Clearing jams EA NOTE All areas of the printer that might need to be opened to clear jams are equipped with green handles for rapid identification 1 Top cover area 2 Duplex path 3 Paper path 4 Input path 5 Paper trays Paper jam recovery This printer automatically provides paper jam recovery a feature that allows you to set whether the printer should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages The options are e AUTO Printer wil
235. ngs Configuration page This page shows the information found on the printer configuration page Supplies Status This page shows the life remaining of HP supplies with 0 representing that a supply is empty This page also provides supplies part numbers To order new supplies click Order Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window To visit any Web site you must have Internet access Event log This page shows a list of all printer events and errors Usage page This page shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed grouped by size and type Device Information This page also shows the printer network name address and model information To change these entries click Device Information on the Settings tab Control panel This page shows an image of the text currently appearing on the printer s control panel display Settings tab This tab allows you to configure the printer from your computer The Settings tab can be password protected If this printer is networked always consult with the printer administrator before changing settings on this tab The Settings tab contains the following pages Configure Device Configure all printer settings from this page This page contains the traditional menus found on printers using a control panel display These menus include Information Paper Handling and Configure Device Alerts Network only Set up to receive e mail alerts for various printe
236. no other paper trays are available for use Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than specified in the job and another paper tray is available Programs and fonts can be stored on the printer s file system and are loaded into RAM when the printer is turned on The number XX specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded The job specifies manual feed but Tray 1 is empty Another tray is available 3 If prompted confirm the size and type of paper loaded 4 Confirm that the media guides are in the correct position 5 To use another tray remove paper from Tray 1 and then press v 1 Load the correct paper in the tray 2 If prompted confirm the size and type of paper loaded 3 Otherwise select another tray Load the correct paper in the tray and press to continue 1 Load the paper tray with the specified media 2 Confirm that the media guides are in the correct position 3 If prompted confirm the size and type of paper loaded 4 To use another tray press v No action necessary Do not turn the printer off Add paper to Tray 1 or press to select another tray 198 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE To continue press v MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE To continue press v alternates with MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE For help pr
237. not configured to match the print job settings The control panel displays the message LOAD TRAY XxX TYPE SIZE To change type press v The instructions below explain how to configure the tray after the prompt appears EA NOTE The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1 and if Tray 1 is configured for ANY SIZE and ANY TYPE Configuring a tray when loading paper A CAUTION If paper is loaded in Trays 3 through 6 when the printer is in sleep mode the new paper will not be sensed when the printer comes out of sleep mode This could cause the wrong paper to be used for a print job Be sure to wake the printer before loading paper in these trays 1 Load paper in the tray Close the tray if you are using Tray 2 or one of the optional trays The printer displays the tray configuration message To change size press v Press v to display the TRAY X SIZE menu To change 3 mm 42 the size press v or to highlight the correct size 1 N Press v to select the size A Setting saved message appears and then a prompt appears to configure the paper type 6 To change the type press or a to highlight the correct paper type 7 Press v to select the paper type Configuring input trays 97 8 A Setting saved message appears and then the current type and size settings are displayed If size and type are now correct press 5 to clear the message Configuring a tray to match print job settings T 2 In the so
238. ns between Windows computers and a printer To install your printer and create objects on a Novell server use an HP utility such as HP Web Jetadmin or a Novell utility such as NWAdmin Installing the printing system software 1 Ifyou are installing the software on Windows 2000 or Windows XP make sure that you have administrator privileges 2 Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server and printer are properly connected to the network Print a configuration page see Printer information pages On the second page of the configuration page locate the IP address that is currently configured You might need this address to initially identify the printer on your network and complete the installation 3 Close all software programs that are open or running 4 Insert the printer CD ROM into the CD ROM drive If the welcome screen does not open start it by using the following procedure e Onthe Start menu click Run e Type the following X setup where X is the letter of the CD ROM drive e Click OK When prompted click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen Click Finish when installation has completed You might need to restart the computer So A Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed If installation fails reinstall the software If this fails check the installation notes and readme files on the printer CD ROM or the fly
239. nsfer unit 8 Close the top and front covers Jams in the stapler stacker EA NOTE After resolving any stapler stacker jams check that there are no jams in the printer itself For more information see Clearing jams 220 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Clearing jams in the paper path 1 Remove any exposed jammed sheets 2 Grasp the stapler stacker unit by its handles and lift it off the body of the printer CAUTION The stapler stacker unit weighs 9 kg 19 8 Ib For greater safety you might wish to remove the stapler stacker while standing at the rear of the printer ENWW Clearing jams 221 3 Set the stapler stacker aside on a flat surface 4 Remove any jammed sheets under the front cover of the duplexer 5 222 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW 6 Place the stapler stacker unit onto the printer SS Ex NOTE The output bin must be pushed down into the lowest position for printing to continue Clearing jams inside the stapler stacker 1 Open the top cover of the stapler stacker unit by the handles ENWW Clearing jams 223 2 If jammed paper can be seen pull it from the stapler stacker Close the stapler stacker cover 3 If a jammed page is only partially visible and cannot easily be removed grasp the stapler stacker unit by its handles and lift it off the body of the printer CAUTION The stapler stacker unit weighs 9 kg 19 8 Ib For greater safety you might wish to remove the stapl
240. nstallation High capacity 5 000 staple cartridge with staples low and staples out messaging capability Internet enabled supply ordering capabilities through the embedded Web server Internet enabled supply ordering capabilities through the HP Easy Printer Care Software For more information see http www hp com go easyprintercare Printer features 9 Walk around The following illustrations identify the locations and names of key components of this printer Front view HP Color LaserJet 4700ph shown 1 Duplexer 2 Stapler stacker 3 Top cover 4 Control panel 5 Front cover access to print cartridges transfer unit and fuser 6 Tray 1 7 On off switch 8 Tray 2 9 Optional paper tray three additional optional paper trays also shown 10 Printer stand 10 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW Back side view HP Color LaserJet 4700ph shown 1 Output tray 2 Formatter board 3 Upper formatter board tab 4 USB connection 5 ACC connection 6 EIO connection 7 Parallel port 8 EIO connection 9 Network port RJ 45 connector 10 Lower formatter board tab 11 Auxiliary port 12 Power cord connection ENWW Walk around 11 Printer software Included with the printer is a CD ROM containing the printing system software The software components and printer drivers on this CD ROM help you use the printer to its fullest potential See the Getting Started Guide for installation instructions EA NOTE For the latest i
241. nu Setting the printer to use another tray 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR Press v to select TRAY BEHAVIOR Press to highlight USE ANOTHER TRAY np p YS N Press a or w to select ENABLED or DISABLED Press v to set the behavior 11 Press Menu Setting the printer to duplex blank pages 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE 2 3 4 Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP 5 Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP 6 Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR 68 Chapter 2 Control panel Press or w to select DISPLAY or DO NOT DISPLAY ENWW ENWW 10 11 Press v to select TRAY BEHAVIOR Press to highlight DUPLEX BLANK PAGES Press or w to select AUTO or YES Press v to set the behavior Press Menu Setting the printer to rotate images 1 PF re FS YS 11 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR Press v to select TRAY BEHAVIOR Press to highlight IMAGE ROTATION Press or w to select STANDARD or ALTERNATE Press v to set the behavior Press Menu Slee
242. o AUTOCONTINUE BLACK and one of the color print cartridges is out The printer continues to print in black only The control panel setting for RESTRICT COLOR USE is set to DISABLE COLOR or it is set to COLOR IF ALLOWED and you do not have permission to print in color Select Color mode instead of grayscale or monochrome mode in the software application or printer driver see Printer information pages to learn how to print a configuration page Select the correct printer driver Consult your service representative Replace the color print cartridge Change the control panel setting to ENABLE COLOR Incorrect shade Table 8 29 Incorrect shade Cause and solution Cause Solution The media does not meet the specifications for this printer You are operating the printer in excessively humid conditions For information on media specifications see Supported media weights and sizes Verify that the printer s environment is within humidity specifications See Environmental specifications 2 Ey NOTE For more information about color quality problems see Print quality troubleshooting Missing color Table 8 30 Missing color Cause and solution Cause Solution Defective HP print cartridge A non HP cartridge might be installed Replace the cartridge Ensure that you are using a genuine HP print cartridge Color printing problems 249 Cartridge error Table 8 31 Inconsisten
243. ob Pressing Stop does not affect subsequent print jobs that are stored in the printer buffer Stopping the current print job from a software application A dialog box will appear briefly on the control panel display giving you the option to cancel the print job If several requests have been sent to the printer through an application the print jobs might be waiting in a print queue for example in Windows Print Manager See the application documentation for specific instructions on canceling a print request from the computer If a print job is waiting in a print queue computer memory or print spooler Windows 98 2000 XP or Me delete the print job there For Windows 98 2000 XP or Me go to Start Settings and then Printers Double click the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer icon to open the print spooler Select the print job you want to cancel and then press Delete If the print job is not cancelled you might need to shut down and restart the computer 134 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW Job storage features The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer lets you store a job in the printers memory for printing at a later time The job storage features use memory from both the hard disk and random access memory RAM These job storage features are described below To support job storage features for complex jobs or if you often print complex graphics print PostScript PS documents or use many downloaded fonts HP recommend
244. oe ENWW Installing a hard disk memory and fonts 267 11 Reconnect the power cable and interface cables and turn the printer on 12 If you installed a memory DIMM go to Enabling memory Installing a flash memory card A CAUTION Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the printer The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card If you install a camera type flash memory card the control panel displays a message asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card If you choose to reformat the card all data on the card will be lost 1 Turn the printer off 268 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards ENWW 2 Disconnect all power and interface cables 3 Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer ENWW Installing a hard disk memory and fonts 269 4 Grasp the black tabs situated near the top and bottom of the formatter board ZZZZ7 TITTY I J 5 Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the printer Place the formatter board on a clean flat grounded surface SS gt ear aOR 2 0 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards ENWW 6 Align the groove on the side of the flash memory card with the notches in the connector and push it in the slot until it is fully seated A CAUTION Do not insert the flash memory
245. olor LaserJet 4700 4700n 4700dn 4700dtn 4700ph kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole kayttajan huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilo Tallaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota variainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita kayttajan kasikirjassa lueteltuja kayttajan tehtavaksi tarkoitettuja yllapitotoimia jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyokaluja VARO Mikali kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina nakymattomallelasersateilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa Ala katso sateeseen VARNING Om laserprinterns skyddsholje ppnas da apparaten ar i funktion uts ttas anv ndaren for osynlig laserstralning Betrakta ej stralen Tiedot laitteessa kaytettavan laserdiodin sateilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 775 795 nm Teho 5m W Luokan 3B laser Regulatory information ENWW Glossary bidirectional communication Two way data transmission bin A receptacle for holding printed pages BOOTP Abbreviation for Bootstrap Protocol an Internet protocol that allows a networked computer or peripheral to automatically obtain its IP configuration from a BOOTP server chooser A Macintosh accessory that allows you to select a device CMYK An acronym for colors cyan magenta yellow and black control panel The area on the printer that contains buttons and a display screen Use the control panel to set printer settings and to get information about the
246. omatically e Smoothing Soften an image Click Automatic to allow the printer software to set the level of smoothing for the image automatically Opening the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box 1 Open the Printer Properties dialog box 2 Click the Paper Quality tab and then click the HP Digital Imaging button EA NOTE Ifyou installed the HP Image Zone software you can use it to edit and further enhance digital photos Using the Services tab E NOTE The Services tab is available for Windows XP Using features in the printer driver 119 lf the product is connected to a network use the Services tab to obtain product and supply status information Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status page of the HP Embedded Web Server This page shows the current status of the product the percentage of life remaining for each supply and information for ordering supplies 120 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW Using features in the Macintosh printer driver ENWW When you print from a software program many of the printer features are available from the printer driver For complete information about the features that are available in the printer driver see the printer driver Help The following features are described in this section e Creating and using presets in Mac OS X e Printing a cover page e Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper e Printing on both sides of the paper e Setting the color options
247. on either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase for the period specified above due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free If HP is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by HP c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance HP s limited warranty is valid in any country region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product The level of warranty service
248. ons for Print Page Borders and Page Order e Click Print Page Borders if you want to print a border around each page on the sheet e Click Page Order to select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet 5 Click OK The product is now set to print the number of pages per sheet that you have selected Printing on both sides of the paper When a duplex printing accessory is installed you can automatically print on both sides of a page If a duplex printing accessory is not installed you can manually print on both sides of a page by feeding the paper through the product a second time EA NOTE Inthe printer driver Print on Both Sides manually is available only when no duplex i printing accessory is installed in the product or when the duplex printing accessory does not support the type of print media being used To print on both sides by using the duplex printing accessory 1 Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job If you are loading special paper such as letterhead load it in one of the following ways e For tray 1 load the letterhead paper with the front side up bottom edge first e For all other trays load the letterhead paper with front side down and the top edge at the back of the tray A CAUTION Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib bond This could lead to a Paper Jam in the printer 2 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 116 Chapter
249. ormation INFORMATION PRINT MENU MAP PRINT CONFIGURATION PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE SUPPLIES STATUS PRINT USAGE PAGE PRINT DEMO PRINT RGB SAMPLES Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW PRINT CMYK SAMPLES PRINT FILE DIRECTORY PRINT PCL FONT LIST PRINT PS FONT LIST Paper handling menu See Paper handling menu for more information PAPER HANDLING TRAY 1 SIZE TRAY 1 TYPE TRAY lt N gt SIZE N 2 3 4 5 or 6 TRAY lt N gt TYPE N 2 3 4 5 or6 Configure device menu See Configure device menu and Changing printer control panel configuration settings for more information CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINTING COPIES DEFAULT PAPER SIZE DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE DUPLEX DUPLEX BINDING OVERRIDE A4 LETTER MANUAL FEED COURIER FONT WIDE A4 PRINT PS ERRORS PRINT PDF ERRORS PCL PRINT QUALITY ADJUST COLOR SET REGISTRATION AUTO SENSE MODE PRINT MODES ENWW Menu hierarchy 47 OPTIMIZE QUICK CALIBRATE NOW FULL CALIBRATE NOW COLOR RET CREATE CLEANING PAGE PROCESS CLEANING PAGE AUTO CLEANING CLEANING INTERVAL SYSTEM SETUP DATE TIME JOB STORAGE LIMIT JOB HELD TIMEOUT SHOW ADDRESS RESTRICT COLOR USE COLOR BLACK MIX TRAY BEHAVIOR SLEEP DELAY WAKE TIME DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS PERSONALITY CLEARABLE WARNINGS AUTO CONTINUE REPLACE SUPPLIES ORDER AT COLOR SUPPLY OUT JAM RECOVERY RAM DISK LANGUAGE STAPLER STACKER STAPLES This menu appears ifa STAPLES OUT stapler stacker is installed OFFSET I O 1 0 T
250. orms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off of preprinted paper e Toload pre printed forms and letterhead into Tray 1 load them face down with the top edge of the page facing toward you e To load pre printed forms and letterhead into Tray 2 or an optional tray load them face up with the top edge of the page facing away from you e When duplex printing load pre printed forms and letterhead into Tray 2 or an optional 500 sheet tray face down with the top edge of the page towards you Recycled paper This printer supports the use of recycled paper Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as standard paper Hewlett Packard recommends that recycled paper contain no more than 5 ground wood 112 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW Using features in the printer driver ENWW When you print from a software program many of the product features are available from the printer driver For complete information about the features that are available in the printer driver see the printer driver Help The following features are described in this section e Creating and using quick sets e Creating and using watermarks e Resizing documents e Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver e Using different paper covers e Printing a blank first page e Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper e Printing on both sides of the paper e Setting the stapling options
251. oting the printer Available on the CD ROM included with the printer Lid ee Jii E Be hrir nn i i z oo ak toe fees 8 Online Help Provides information on printer options that are available from within printer drivers To view a Help file access the online Help through the printer driver Quick access to printer information 3 Printer configurations Thank you for purchasing the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer This printer is available in the configurations described below HP Color LaserJet 4700 product number Q7491A The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer is a four color laser printer that prints up to 31 pages per minute ppm for letter sized paper and up to 30 ppm for A4 size paper e Trays The printer comes with a multipurpose tray Tray 1 that holds up to 100 sheets of various print media or 20 envelopes A standard 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 2 supports letter legal executive 8 5 x 13 JIS B5 executive JIS 16K A4 and A5 and custom media The printer can support up to four optional 500 sheet paper feeders Trays 3 4 5 and 6 e Connectivity The printer provides parallel network and auxiliary ports for connectivity Two enhanced input output EIO slots wireless connectivity capability with optional print server auxiliary port universal serial bus USB and acc
252. ou can use many types of paper and other print media with this printer This section provides guidelines and specifications for selecting and using different print media For more information about supported print media see Print media specifications It is possible that media could meet all of the guidelines in this chapter and still not print satisfactorily This may be due to abnormal characteristics of the printing environment or to other variables over which Hewlett Packard has no control for example extremes in temperature and humidity Hewlett Packard recommends testing any media before buying it in large quantities CAUTION Using media that does not conform to the specifications listed here or in the paper specification guide can cause problems that require service This service is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements Media to avoid This printer can handle many types of media Use of media outside the printer s specifications will cause a loss of print quality and increase the chance of paper jams e Do not use paper that is too rough e Do not use paper with cutouts or perforations other than standard 3 hole punched paper e Donotuse multipart forms e Do not use paper that has already been printed on or that has been fed through a photocopier e Do not use paper with a watermark if you are printing solid patterns Paper that can damage the printer In rare circumstances paper can damage the
253. p delay The adjustable sleep mode feature reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for an extended period You can set the length of time before the printer enters sleep mode to 1 MINUTE 15 MINUTES 30 MINUTES 45 MINUTES 60 MINUTES 90 MINUTES 2 HOURS or 4 HOURS The default setting is 30 MINUTES NOTE The printer display dims when the printer is in sleep mode This mode does not affect printer warm up time Setting sleep delay 1 a a e 8 N Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight SLEEP DELAY Press v to select SLEEP DELAY Changing printer control panel configuration settings 69 8 Press a or w to select the appropriate time period 9 Press v to set the time period 10 Press Menu A CAUTION If paper is loaded in Trays 3 through 6 when the printer is in sleep mode the new paper will not be sensed when the printer comes out of sleep mode This could cause the wrong paper to be used for a print job Be sure to wake the printer before loading paper in these trays Disabling enabling sleep mode 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight RESETS Press v to select RESETS Press to highlight SLEEP MODE Press v to select SLEEP MODE Press a or w to s
254. p program cccccceeccceeeseeeeeeecaeeeaeeese cess eeseeeseeeseesuesseeeseeeseeeses 297 Protecting the environment ccccccecsececsececseeceeeeceuecceeeceeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeesaseesaseeseseeneeeenaass 297 OZone producion r steed eieeaadeeatectescadgiebeeediceetdem needed 297 P OW EP CONSUMO secs ccecee ted ac ct oasonec teceurecae EE E EEES 297 PADO SO ae tape sen esta sie het ence ease cesteecdcceesnce wea E EE E EEE 297 FS esheets csc ccm ee os cess nee eee reese Sse wi se et aes seine A E AT AA TA 297 HP LaserJet printing supplies cece cece ceecceececeeeceeeceecaeesaeecagecaeecauessussaeeseeeaeesaseeseeeses 297 HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information cccccseeeeseeeeeees 297 SCN PADOT oseraies a a a a iaaa E eE Ea 298 Maternal TOSUICUOIS onccce nonce ncctancdewedancecuddenceutesensdeuccensidavockulseudauaede bodexdiccinshciencbeestdabecewetndencen 298 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European OIA OU csacetess dete T acttsee veeeas amuse suceen E E 299 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS cc ecccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeesaeees 299 FOr more information cece ce ccceeccceececeeeeaeeeeeeeeae cece eeseeeceeeesseeseeceseeesaueeseeesaeeesaueesaeesneeaes 299 Declaration of Conformity inset scale sin sdheaniienieriscrasn tes ineewancrlue tsianiesseledeclinmieie vinwdeieanuasianlabentlclabndiineauengeaidee Menuteddu
255. pe selected on the printer control panel and the media type selected in the application or printer driver match the type of media loaded in the tray Transparencies When printing on transparencies use the following guidelines Handle transparencies using the edges Oils from your fingers deposited on the transparency can cause print quality problems Use only overhead transparencies recommended for use in this printer Hewlett Packard recommends using HP Color Laser Transparencies HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results In either the software application or the driver select TRANSPARENCY as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for transparencies For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers A CAUTION Transparencies not designed for LaserJet printing might melt in the printer or wrap around the fuser causing damage to the printer Glossy paper In either the software application or the driver select GLOSSY HEAVY GLOSSY or EXTRA HEAVY GLOSSY as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper Use the control panel to set the media type to GLOSSY for the input tray being used Because this affects all print jobs it is important to return the printer to its original settings once the job has printed See Configuring input trays for more information E NOTE Hewlett Packard recommends using HP Color Laser Glossy P
256. pied because of a memory disk or configuration problem Only one copy will be produced Order and install a new stapler cartridge For information about replacing the stapler cartridge see Replacing the stapler cartridge To ensure that documents are properly stapled ensure that the job does not exceed the specified number of sheets for the selected media 1 Open the top and front covers CAUTION The image transfer unit can be easily damaged 2 Open the image transfer unit 3 Insert the print cartridge and make sure that it is fully seated 4 Close the image transfer unit and then close the top and front covers 5 Ifthe error persists contact HP support at http www hp com support clj4700 Refill the tray at a convenient time Close the tray No action is necessary 1 Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper 2 If necessary press after the tray is closed to change the paper size or type to match the paper loaded in the tray Install additional memory in the printer or install a disk drive in the printer 208 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW Unable to Store Job JOB NAME alternates with Processing USE TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To change press a v To use press v Wait for printer to reinitialize Waiting for tray X to lift Warming up ENWW Description A job cannot be stored because of a memory disk or configuration problem The printer is offeri
257. plies the locations of paper jams and job status Menus give access to printer functions and detailed status information The top level screen on the display has two areas 38 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW ENWW To return to ready press STOP key Figure 2 2 Printer display 1 Message area 2 Prompt area C Figure 2 3 Printer display PA 1 Message area 2 Supplies gauge 3 Print cartridge colors are indicated from left to right black magenta cyan and yellow The message and prompt areas of the display alert you to the state of the printer and tell you how to respond The supplies gauge shows the consumption levels of print cartridges black magenta cyan and yellow A appears instead of the consumption level when the level is not known This can occur in the following circumstances e Missing cartridges e Incorrectly placed cartridges e Cartridges with an error e Some non HP cartridges The supplies gauge appears whenever the printer shows the Ready state with no warnings It will also appear when the printer shows a warning or error message concerning a print cartridge or multiple Supplies Introduction 39 Accessing the control panel from a computer You can also access the printer control panel from a computer by using the Settings page of the embedded Web server The computer shows the same information that the control panel shows From your computer you can also perform
258. plies installed INCORRECT COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges Incorrect PIN INCORRECT SUPPLIES For status press v The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges Initializing permanent storage Initializing INSERT OR CLOSE TRAY X For help press The EIO disk in slot X is not working correctly The EIO disk device in slot X is initializing The EIO disk device in slot X is spinning up its platter SHOW EVENT LOG was selected from the control panel and the event log is empty A new HP cartridge has been installed The printer returns to the Ready state after approximately 10 seconds A cartridge is installed in the wrong slot and the cover is closed The wrong PIN was entered After three incorrect PIN entries the printer will return to Ready At least one supply item is incorrectly positioned in the printer and another supply item is missing incorrectly placed out or low Displayed when the printer is turned on to show that permanent storage is being initialized This message is displayed when the printer is turned on as soon as the individual tasks begin initialization Tray XX must be inserted or closed before the current job can be printed 1 rA Turn the printer off Remove the EIO disk from the slot indicated and replace with a new EIO disk driv
259. ply item or make sure the installed supply item is fully seated The transfer unit is not installed or is not installed correctly The device does not have enough memory to load the data such as fonts or macros from the location specified Device can be one of the following INTERNAL ROM directly on the formatter board CARD SLOT X font card in slot X DIMMS EIO X DISK removable hard disk installed in EIO slot X The internal disk device is initializing The internal disk is not working correctly The internal disk is spinning up This message generally appears for approximately 15 seconds when the printer emerges from sleep mode Jobs can still print but jobs that require disk access such as stored jobs must wait until the disk is initialized This message appears when Tray 1 is selected but is not loaded and no other paper trays are available for use Tray 1 is loaded and configured for a type and size other than the one specified in the job Confirm that the fuser is installed in the printer and is fully seated Press v to see step by step information 1 Press to access the SUPPLIES STATUS menu m Press and to highlight the specific supply that has a problem 3 Press to view help for the supply 4 Press and to step through the instructions 1 Press Y to access the SUPPLIES STATUS menu 2 Press to highlight the transfer unit 3 Press to view help
260. print jobs The following topics are covered Introduction Control panel buttons Interpreting control panel indicator lights Interpreting stapler stacker indicator light codes Control panel menus Menu hierarchy Retrieve job menu Information menu Paper handling menu Configure device menu Diagnostics menu Changing printer control panel configuration settings Using the printer control panel in shared environments 37 Introduction The control panel provides control of printer functions and communicates information about the printer and print jobs Its display provides graphic information about printer and supplies status making it easy to identify and correct problems Figure 2 1 Control panel buttons and lights 1 Display 2 Up arrow 4 button 3 Select Y button 4 Down arrow V button 5 Stop button 6 Attention light 7 Data light 8 Ready light 9 Menu button 10 Back Exit button 11 Help button The printer communicates via the display and the lights on the lower left side of the control panel The Ready Data and Attention lights provide at a glance information about the state of the printer and alert you to printing problems The display shows more complete status information as well as menus help information animations and error messages Display The four line control panel display gives you complete timely information about the printer and print jobs Graphics illustrate levels of sup
261. printer Problem solving Printer response problems Control panel display is blank Table 8 11 No display message Cause and solution Cause Solution The printer s on off button is in the standby position The printer s memory DIMMs are defective or installed incorrectly The power cord is not firmly plugged into both the printer and the power receptacle The line voltage is incorrect for the printer power configuration The power cord is damaged or excessively worn The power source receptacle is not working correctly Verify that the printer is on Fans might run while the printer is in standby mode off Verify that the printer s memory DIMMs are correctly installed and are not defective Turn off the printer and then disconnect and reconnect the power cord Turn the printer back on Connect the printer to a proper voltage source as specified on the Power Rating Label on the back of the printer Replace the power cord Connect the printer to a different power receptacle Printer does not print Table 8 12 Printer is on but nothing prints Cause and solution Cause Solution The printer s Ready indicator light is not lit The top cover is not closed properly The Data indicator light is flashing REPLACE lt COLOR gt CARTRIDGE appears on the printer display A printer message other than Ready appears on the printer control panel The output bin is full The stapl
262. printer Avoid the following paper to prevent possible damage to the printer e Do not use paper with staples attached e Do not use transparencies designed for inkjet printers or other low temperature printers or transparencies designed for monochrome printing Use only transparencies that are specified for use with HP Color LaserJet printers e Do not use glossy or photo papers intended for inkjet printers e Donotuse paper that is embossed or coated and is not designed for the temperatures of the image fuser Select media that can tolerate temperatures of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Do not use letterhead paper with low temperature dyes or thermography Preprinted forms or letterhead must use inks that can tolerate temperatures of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Do not use any media that produces undesirable emissions or that melts offsets or discolors when exposed to 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second To order HP Color LaserJet printing supplies go to http www hp com go lijsupplies in the United States or to http www hp com ghp buyonline html worldwide 94 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW Automatic media type sensing auto sense mode ENWW The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers can automatically classify media into one of the following categories e Plain e Transparency e Glossy e Extra heavy glossy e Glossy film e Heavy e Light The automatic media type sensor functions only when that tray is configu
263. printer s status DDR Acronym for double data rate default The normal or standard setting for hardware or software DHCP An acronym for dynamic host configuration protocol DHCP enables individual computers or peripherals connected to a network to automatically obtain their IP configuration from a DHCP server DIMM An acronym for dual in line memory module A small circuit board that holds memory chips duplex A feature that allows printing on both sides of a sheet of paper EIO An acronym for Enhanced Input Output A hardware interface used for adding an internal print server network adaptor hard disk and other plug in functionality for HP printers embedded Web server A server that is completely contained within a device Embedded Web servers provide management information about the device They are helpful for managing single devices on a small network By using a Web browser to access an embedded Web server network users can obtain network printer status updates perform simple troubleshooting operations change device configuration settings and link to online customer support When you need to manage many network devices it is more effective to use an integrated Web server management tool such as HP Web Jetadmin Emulated PostScript Software that emulates Adobe PostScript a programming language that describes the appearance of the printed page firmware Programming instructions that are stored in a read only memory unit insid
264. printer to print an A4 job on letter size paper when no A4 paper is loaded The default is YES Allows you to manually feed media The default is OFF Allows you to select a version of the Courier font The default is REGULAR Allows you to change the printable area of A4 paper so that eighty 10 pitch characters may be printed on a single line The default is NO Allows you to select to print PS error pages The default is OFF Allows you to select to print PDF error pages The default is OFF FORM LENGTH Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size ORIENTATION Allows you to select default page orientation to portrait or landscape ENWW Configure device menu 53 Menu item Values Description FONT PITCH FONT SOURCE Allows you to select the font source as internal card slot 1 2 or 3 FONT POINT SIZE internal disk or EIO disk SYMBOL SET FONT NUMBER The printer assigns a number to each font and lists the numbers APPEND CR TO LF on the PCL font list The range is 0 to 999 SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES FONT PITCH Selects the font pitch This item might not appear depending on the MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING font selected The range is 0 44 to 99 99 FONT POINT SIZE Selects the font point size This appears only if a font with a scalable point size is selected as the default font The range is 4 00 to 999 75 SYMBOL SET Selects any one of several available symbol sets at the printer control pa
265. printer to use size type prompt cece ecccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaes 68 Setting the printer to use another tray cece eeccccseeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeenaeees 68 Setting the printer to duplex blank pages ccccceccceececeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeesaes 68 Setting the printer to rotate images ccccecccsseecceeeeceeeecceeesseeeeseusesseseeesaaes 69 Sleep delay aa R a Sad ed dled a a Minha ested 69 Setna SleeKaAClAy reina a ENA 69 Disabling enabling sleep mode ccccceceseececeeeceeeeecaeeeeaeeeeeaeeesseeeeaeeeesaueesenees 70 Wake CITI ees ccasin casei ee evince sly el eo aaa aia ciel oa eat a A aetna its ai ained 70 Setting the wake LING onsin yalinda aa asedamuieit paciarluenmnaaobucautotseudeasbavaceulede 70 Display DHIGIA CSS eo yaatcael iin sieht ek onaat a detain aan daeidasecaseeinauaes 71 Setting the display brightness ccceccccsececseeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeseeeseeeeeeeees 71 Personali iss cael cic atic cee natura Maw E a a 72 Seung Me personaly seier a tne deleudeeuedneeteddciton 72 Clearable WARING S sicr aneia A a a setae teats 72 Setting the Clearable warnings c ccccccceecceseeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseueesseeeesaeeeesaeeesaeees 72 AUO COMUMUC 42 26 hetc ced laeivis asa e et lsadashesatbialaeistbandaeuesaatadelivded EA once deeded aaeetutel ies 73 SEUNG QUO COMMU sesione a oan vende h dene eadade 73 FREDIACS SUP DIGS fesse tenant dete rs dltsad
266. program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the compact disc CD that came with the printer Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer e HP Printer Utility The HP Printer Utility provides access to features that are not available in the printer driver Use the illustrated screens to select printer features and complete the following tasks with the printer e Name the printer e Assign the printer to a zone on the network e Assign an internet protocol IP address to the printer e Download files and fonts e Configure and set the printer for IP or AppleTalk printing You can use the HP Printer Utility when your printer uses a universal serial bus USB or is connected to a TCP IP based network EA NOTE The HP Printer Utility is supported for Mac OS X v10 2 8 and v10 3 For more information about using the HP Printer Utility see Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh To install printer drivers for Mac OS 9 1 and 9 2 1 Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port 2 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive The CD menu runs automatically If the CD menu does not run automatically double click the CD icon on the desktop 3 Double click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder 4 Follow the instructions on the computer screen 5 On the computer hard drive open Applications open Utilities and then open Desktop Printer Utility 24
267. r For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers Symbol sets Table 8 18 Unable to print all characters in a symbol set Cause and solution Cause Solution The correct font is not selected Select the correct font The correct symbol set is not selected Select the correct symbol set The selected character or symbol is not supported by the Use a font that supports the selected character or symbol software application Drifting text Table 8 19 Drifting text between printouts Cause and solution Cause Solution Your software application is not resetting the printer to the top See the documentation for the software or the PCL PJL of the page Technical Reference Package for specific information Output errors Table 8 20 Erratic missing characters or interrupted printout Cause and solution Cause Solution The interface cable is of poor quality Try using a different higher quality IEEE compliant cable Parallel cables can be no longer than 10 meters 30 feet ENWW Incorrect printer output 239 Table 8 20 Erratic missing characters or interrupted printout continued Cause and solution Cause Solution The interface cable is loose Disconnect and reconnect the interface cable The interface cable is damaged or bad Try using a different interface cable The power cable is loose Disconnect and reconnect the power cable You are attempting
268. r and supplies events Alerts may also be sent to a URL E mail Network only Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up incoming and outgoing e mail as well as to set e mail alerts Security Set a password that must be entered to gain access to the Settings and Networking tabs Enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server Other Links Add or customize a link to another Web site This link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages These permanent links always appear in the Other Links area HP Instant Support Order Supplies and Product Support Device Information Name the printer and assign an asset number to it Enter the name and e mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer Language Determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server information Using the embedded Web server 14 7 e Time Services Configure the printer s time settings e Restrict Color Set user color print job restrictions For more information on restricting and reporting color usage see http www hp com go coloraccess Setting the real time clock Use the real time clock feature to set the date and time settings The date and time information is attached to stored print jobs so that you can identify the most recent versions of stored print jobs When setting the clock you can set the date format date time format and time Networking
269. r loaded 1 Load the correct paper in Tray 1 2 If prompted confirm the size and type of paper loaded 3 Otherwise press to select another tray 1 Load Tray 1 with the correct paper 2 If prompted confirm the size and type of paper loaded 3 Otherwise press to select another tray Follow the instructions on the Print on Both Sides instruction dialog box at the computer OR Press for help at the printer Use a uniform paper size when sending jobs to the stapler No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary ENWW Control panel messages 199 Control panel message Description Recommended action NON HP SUPPLY IN USE alternates with Ready The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges but the level of any refilled cartridge will not be shown ORDER COLOR CARTRIDGE The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges alternates with Ready The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges ORDER FUSER KIT LESS THAN XXX PAGES For help press alternates with Ready ORDER SUPPLIES alternates with Ready For help press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges The printer has detected that a non HP print cartridge is currently installed The identified print cartridge is nearing the end of
270. r out of the box In the Windows environment the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab in the printer driver For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers sRGB Standard red green blue SRGB is a world wide color standard originally developed by HP and Microsoft as a common color language for monitors input devices scanners digital cameras and output devices printers plotters It is the default color space used for HP products Microsoft operating systems the Web and most office software sold today SRGB is representative of the typical Windows computer monitor today and the convergence standard for high definition television EA NOTE Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room s lighting can affect the appearance of colors on your screen For more information see Color matching The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop CorelDRAW Microsoft Office and many other applications use SRGB to communicate color Most importantly as the default color space in Microsoft operating 152 Chapter6 Color ENWW systems SRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between applications and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience greatly improved color matching SRGB improves your ability to match colors between the printer the computer monitor and other input devices scanner digital camera automatically w
271. r the printer and you can also install a font card to allow the printer to print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet CAUTION Static electricity can damage DIMMs When handling DIMMs either wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the printer Installing a hard drive 1 Turn the printer off 2 ENWW Installing a hard disk memory and fonts 261 3 Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer ZZZZ7 TITTY I J 4 Locate an open EIO slot Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot and then remove the cover You will not need these screws and the cover again They can be discarded 5 7 IIIZ IIIN CESS K L p ez L asmane 262 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards ENWW 6 Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the hard disk 7 Connect the cables and power cord and turn the printer on ES N Z D Sa Installing DDR memory DIMMs 1 Turn the printer off ENWW Installing a hard disk memory and fonts 263 2 Disconnect all power and interface cables ZZ IIZI pom mm IZZZ7Z7 III C A e A H L ee 3 Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer ZZ
272. rays passes through Tray 2 If Tray 2 is partially pulled out or removed paper from Tray 3 cannot feed into the printer The printer will stop and generate a message that Tray 2 must be installed Similarly all trays installed above the tray that is being used must be closed for paper to feed into the printer Loading detectable standard sized media into Tray 2 and optional trays CAUTION If paper is loaded in Trays 3 through 6 when the printer is in sleep mode the new paper will not be sensed when the printer comes out of sleep mode This could cause the wrong paper to be used for a print job Be sure to wake the printer before loading paper in these trays The following detectable standard sized media is supported in Tray 2 and the optional trays letter legal executive A4 A5 and JIS B5 CAUTION Do not print cardstock envelopes heavy or extra heavy paper or unsupported sizes of media from the 500 sheet trays Print on these types of media only from Tray 1 Do not overfill the input tray or open it while it is in use Doing so can cause jams in the printer 1 Remove the tray from the printer EA NOTE After sliding the tray out lift the tray up slightly to remove it Configuring input trays 103 2 Adjust the rear media length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back of the tray to the length of the media being used 4 Load media into the tray face up EA NOTE For best performance load th
273. re printer driver default settings select Default Print Settings from the Print Task Quick Sets drop down list Creating and using watermarks A watermark is a notice such as Confidential that is printed in the background of each page of a document To use an existing watermark 1 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 2 From the Effects tab click the Watermarks drop down list 3 Click the watermark that you want to use 4 Ifyou want the watermark to appear only on the first page of the document click First Page Only 5 Click OK The product is now set to print the watermark that you have selected To remove the watermark click none in the Watermarks drop down list Resizing documents Use the document resizing options to scale a document to a percentage of its normal size You can also choose to print a document on a different size paper with or without scaling To reduce or enlarge a document 1 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 2 On the Effects tab type the percentage by which you want to reduce or enlarge your document You can also use the scroll bar to adjust the reduce or enlarge percentage 3 Click OK The product is now set to scale the document to the reduce or enlarge percentage that you selected To print a document onto a different paper size 1 Open the printer driver see Gaining access to the printer drivers 2 On the Effects tab c
274. red to Any Type Plain Configuring a tray to any other type such as Bond or Glossy deactivates the media sensor in that tray E NOTE Get optimal performance with the automatic media sensing feature when using original HP media designed for use in HP color LaserJet printers Tray 1 sensing Full sensing default e The printer stops at each page to sense media type e This is the best mode for using mixed media in a single print job Expanded sensing e Each time the printer begins a print job it stops the first page to sense the type e The printer assumes that the second and all subsequent pages are of the same media type as the first page e This is the second fastest mode and is useful for using stacks of the same media type Transparency e The printer does not stop any pages for sensing but distinguishes between transparencies Transparency mode and paper Normal mode This is the fastest mode and is useful for high volume printing in Normal mode Automatic media type sensing auto sense mode 95 Tray 2 N sensing Expanded sensing e The printer stops the first five pages fed from each paper tray to sense the type and averages the five results e The printer assumes that the sixth and all subsequent pages are of the same media type until the printer is turned off or goes into sleep mode or until the tray is opened Transparency only default e The printer does not stop any pages for sens
275. request 134 storing jobs deleting 136 printing 135 private jobs 136 proof and hold jobs 135 quick copying 138 storing 138 subnet mask 81 supplies locating 167 ordering 277 replacement intervals 168 replacing 167 status 147 status page 147 supplies low configuring alerts 175 ordering reminder 74 supplies out configuring alerts 175 supplies status page description 51 printing 143 system setup menu 56 T tray 1 117 123 tray behavior 66 trays double sided printing 123 troubleshooting checklist 178 color printing problems 249 control panel problems 238 duplexing 234 EPS files 244 247 incorrect printer output 239 jams 210 Macintosh problems 243 media handling problems 230 117 ENWW overhead transparencies 251 print quality 251 printer response 235 software applications 241 transparencies 233 two sided printing control panel settings 126 manual 127 U UNIX drivers 19 Update Now 12 usage page description 51 printing 143 USB configuration 86 USB port troubleshooting Macintosh 244 247 Use Different Paper Covers 115 user interface 7 W Wake time changing 70 wake time setting 70 warranty print cartridge 285 product 283 284 transfer unit 286 watermarks cover page 121 Windows drivers accessing 20 wireless printing 802 11b standard 89 Bluetooth 89 wrong printer sending to 243 ENWW Index 311 312 Index ENWW 2005 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P www
276. ring it in the printer s RAM The remainder of the copies are Job storage features 137 printed at the printer s fastest speed Documents can be created controlled managed and finished from the desktop which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers support mopying provided they have enough total memory 160 MB DDR plus 32 MB on the formatter board The mopying feature is enabled by default if the Mopier Mode setting is Enabled in the Device Settings tab Storing a print job You can download a print job to the printer without printing it You can then print the job at any time through the printer control panel For example you might want to download a personnel form calendar time sheet or accounting form that other users can access and print To store a print job permanently select the Stored Job option in the driver when printing the job 1 Press Menu to enter MENUS RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted Press v to select RETRIEVE JOB 2 3 4 Press to highlight your USER NAME 5 Press v to select your USER NAME 6 Press to highlight a JOB NAME 7 Press v to select the JOB NAME PRINT is highlighted 8 Press v to select PRINT 9 Press a or w to select the number of copies needed 10 Press v to print the job Quick copying a job Quick Copy stores a copy of a printed job on the hard disk and allows you to print additional copies of a print job using the control pane
277. rinter off then on PRINTER ERROR 2 Ifthe problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com To continue support clj4700 turn off then on 58 0X A memory tag error was detected 1 Turn the printer off then on PRINTER ERROR 2 If the problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com For help press support cli4700 alternates with 58 0X PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 59 XY A printer motor error has occurred 1 Turn the printer off then on PRINTER ERROR 2 Ifthe problem persists contact For help press alternates with 59 XY HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Note This message might also appear if the transfer unit is missing or incorrectly installed Ensure that the transfer unit is correctly installed 190 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 60 X A tray lifting error has occurred where XX is 1 Press v to see step by step information the number of the tray PRINTER ERROR 2 Ifthe error reappears turn the printer off then on alternates with 3 Ifthe error does not clear record the To continue message and contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 turn off then on 62 NO SYSTEM No system was found 1 Turn the printer off then on To continue 2 Ifthe problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com turn off then on support clj4700
278. rmine whether the paper path sensors are Operating correctly COMPONENT TEST This item will activate individual parts independently to isolate noise leaking PRINT STOP TEST COLOR BAND TEST and other hardware issues This item isolates print quality faults more accurately by stopping the printer in mid print cycle Stopping the printer in mid print cycle allows you to see where the image begins to degrade Stopping the printer in mid print cycle will cause a jam that may need to be manually removed A service representative should perform this test Use this page to print a color band test page that is used to identify arcing in the high voltage power supply Diagnostics menu 63 Changing printer control panel configuration settings By using the printer control panel you can make changes to general printer configuration default settings such as tray size and type sleep mode printer personality language and jam recovery The printer control panel can also be accessed from a computer by using the Settings page of the embedded Web server The computer shows the same information that the control panel shows For more information see Using the embedded Web server CAUTION Configuration settings seldom need to be changed Hewlett Packard recommends that only the system administrator change configuration settings Job storage limit This option sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs stored on the hard disk at th
279. rred on the specified drive Printing can continue for jobs that do not require the Flash DIMM 1 Press to continue 2 Ifthe message persists turn the printer off then on 3 Ifthe problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 Press to continue 2 Ifthe message persists turn the printer off then on 3 Ifthe problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Turn the printer off then on Press for more information 1 Turn the printer off then on 2 Ifthe problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 Turn the printer off then on 2 Ifthe problem persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Turn the printer off then on Press for more information If the message persists contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 To clear the message press the key 2 Ifthe message persists remove and re install the ElO disk drive 192 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message alternates with Ready FS DEVICE WRITE PROTECTED To clear press v alternates with Ready FS FILE OPERATION FAILED To clear press v alternates with Ready FS FILE SYSTEM IS FULL To clear press v alternates with Ready FS NOT INITIALIZED ABCDEFGHIJ 0110000000 alternates with To exit press Stop Access Denied MENUS LOCKED BAD DUPLEXER CO
280. rs Showing the IP address 1 P Ip mmp pP Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight SHOW ADDRESS Press v to select SHOW ADDRESS Press a or v to select the desired option Press v to select the option Press Menu Color black mix This item allows you to configure printer settings to optimize printer and cartridge performance for the printing environment If the printer is primarily used for black printing over two thirds of the pages are black only change the printer settings to MOSTLY BLACK PAGES If the printer is primarily used for color printing change the printer settings to MOSTLY COLOR PAGES If the printer is used for a mix of black only and color print jobs it is recommended that you use the printer default of AUTO To determine the percentage of color pages print a configuration page See Printer information pages to learn how to print a configuration page The configuration page shows the total number of pages printed and the number of color pages printed To determine the percentage of color pages printed divide the color page count by the total page count Setting the color black mix 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press w to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press w to highlight SYSTEM SETUP
281. rs and disk drives ENWW HP maintenance agreements 287 288 Appendix C Service and Support ENWW D Printer specifications ENWW 289 Physical dimensions Table D 4 Physical dimensions Product Height Depth Width Weight HP Color LaserJet 582 mm 22 9 in 598 mm 23 5 in 521 mm 20 5 in 47 7 kg 105 1 Ib 4700 and HP Color LaserJet 4700n HP Color LaserJet 628 6 mm 24 7 in 598 mm 23 5 in 521 mm 20 5 in 48 9 kg 107 8 lb 4700dn with duplexer HP Color LaserJet 1010 6 mm 39 8 in 715 mm 28 2 in 630 mm 24 8 in 104 3 kg 230 Ib 4700dtn with Trays 3 and 4 duplexer and stand HP Color LaserJet 1375 5 mm 54 2 in 715 mm 28 2 in 630 mm 24 8 in 130 5 kg 287 7 lb 4700ph with Trays 3 4 5 and 6 duplexer stapler stacker and stand 750 sheet stapler 305 mm 12 in 476 mm 18 7 in 500 mm 19 7 in 8 4 kg 18 5 Ib stacker Optional paper tray 117 mm 4 6 in 578 mm 22 8 in 514 mm 20 25 in 8 9 kg 19 6 lb Printer stand 148 mm 5 8 in 715 mm 28 2 in 630 mm 24 8 in 37 6 kg 83 Ib 290 AppendixD Printer specifications ENWW Electrical specifications 110 Volt models 220 Volt models Power requirements 100 127V 10 220 240V 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 50 60 Hz 2 Hz Rated current 8 Amps 4 Amps Table D 2 Power consumption average in watts e Power consumption average in watts Product model Printing 31 ppm Ready 4 Sleep Off let
282. ry connecting directly to the computer or use a different port Make sure that Printer USB or Printer LPR is selected in the Desktop Printer Utility depending on the type of connection that exists between the printer and the computer In order to check the printer name or IP address print a configuration page Verify that the printer name or IP address on the configuration page matches the printer name or IP address in the Desktop Printer Utility Replace the interface cable Make sure to use a high quality cable The PostScript Printer Description PPD file for the printer does not appear as a selection in the Desktop Printer Utility Cause Solution The printer software might not have been installed or was installed incorrectly The PostScript Printer Description PPD file is corrupt Make sure that the LaserJet 4700 PPD is in the following hard drive folder System Folder Extensions Printer Descriptions lf necessary reinstall the software See the getting started guide for instructions Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder System Folder Extensions Printer Descriptions Reinstall the software See the getting started guide for instructions A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted Cause Solution The print queue might be stopped The wrong printer name or IP address is being used Another printer that has the same or a similar name or IP address might have re
283. s computers 157 Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting e Black Only generates neutral colors grays and black using only black toner This guarantees neutral colors without a color cast e 4 Color generates neutral colors grays and black by combining all four toner colors This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to non neutral colors and it produces the darkest black EA NOTE Some applications convert text or graphics to raster images In these cases setting the color options for Photographs also affects how text and graphics appear Restricting color printing The HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series printers include a RESTRICT COLOR USE setting for networked printers A network administrator can use the setting to restrict user access to the color printing features in order to conserve color toner If you are unable to print in color see your network administrator 1 Press Menu 2 Press v to select PRINT QUALITY and then press v 3 Press w to select SYSTEM SETUP and then press v 4 Press to select RESTRICT COLOR USE and then press v 5 Press to select one of the following options e DISABLE COLOR This setting denies the printer color capabilities to all users ENABLE COLOR This is the default setting which allows all users to use the printer color capabilities e COLOR IF ALLOWED This setting allows the network administrator to allow color use for select users Use the embedded We
284. s message gt REPLACE TRANSFER KIT The transfer unit is at end of life Printing can 1 Open the top and front cover continue but print quality might be reduced For help press 2 Lower the transfer unit by pulling the green handle at the top of the unit downward 3 Depress the small blue latches located on either side of the bottom of the transfer unit and lift the unit out of the printer 4 Install the new transfer unit 5 Close the front and top covers 6 Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information REPLACE TRANSFER KIT The transfer unit is nearing the end of its 1 Order the transfer kit useful life and the REPLACE SUPPLIES For help press setting inthe SYSTEM SETUP menuissetto 2 To continue printing press v STOP AT LOW alternates with 3 To replace the transfer kit perform the following steps REPLACE TRANSFER KIT e Open the top and front cover To continue press v e Lower the transfer unit by pulling the green handle at the top of the unit downward e Depress the small blue latches located on either side of the bottom of the transfer unit and lift the unit out of the printer e Install the new transfer unit e Close the front and top covers e Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for more information Request accepted The printer has
285. s that you install additional memory Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features such as quick copying EA NOTE To use the Private Job Proof and Hold and Mopy features the printer must have a minimum of 256 MB DDR plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board To use the quick copy and stored jobs features you must install an optional hard disk in the printer HP Color LaserJet 4700 4700n 4700dn 4700dtn models and properly configure the drivers A CAUTION Make sure to uniquely identify jobs in the printer driver before printing Using default names may override previous jobs with the same default name or cause the job to be deleted For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers Proofing and holding a job The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job and then print addtional copies This option stores the print job on the printer hard disk or in printer RAM memory and prints only the first copy of the job allowing you to check the first copy If the document prints correctly you can print the remaining copies of the print job from the printer control panel The number of proof and hold print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set from the printer control panel To permanently store the job and prevent the printer from deleting it select the Stored Job option in the driver Printing stored jobs 1
286. s v to select the value After the unit of measure is set properly set the X dimension as follows 8 Press a or w to highlight the correct value 9 Press v to select the value If the value entered is outside the valid range Invalid value will appear for two seconds The display prompts you to enter another value After the X dimension is set properly set the Y dimension as follows 10 Press a or to highlight the correct value 11 Press v to select the value If the value entered is outside the valid range Invalid value will appear for two seconds The display prompts you to enter another value The printer displays a message indicating the dimensions for the custom size Printing from Tray 1 multipurpose tray Tray 1 is a multipurpose tray that holds up to 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper or 20 envelopes It provides a convenient way to print envelopes transparencies custom size paper media heavier than 32 b or other types of media without having to unload the other trays Loading Tray 1 A CAUTION To avoid jams never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing 1 Open Tray 1 2 Set the side guides to the desired width 3 Load paper in the tray with the side to be printed facing down and the top of the page facing you E NOTE Tray 1 can hold approximately 100 sheets of standard 75 g m 20 Ib office paper NOTE Ifyou are duplex printing see Two sided duplex printing for loading instructions 100 Ch
287. s you change settings on 2 From the Printing menu you want to on the various the pop up menu click click Change Setup pop up menus Save Settings Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW Operating System To change the settings for all To change the print job default To change the configuration print jobs until the software settings for example turn on settings for example add a program is closed Print on Both Sides by default physical option such as a tray or turn on or off a driver feature such as Allow Manual Duplexing Mac OS X v10 2 8 1 On the File menu click 1 On the File menu click 1 Inthe Finder on the Go Print Print menu click Applications 2 Change any settings that 2 Change the settings that 2 Open Utilities and then you want to on the various you want on the various open Print Center pop up menus pop up menus and then on the Presets pop up 3 Click on the print queue menu click Save as and type a name for the preset 4 On the Printers menu click Show Info These settings are saved in the Presets menu To use the new Click the Installable settings you must select the Options menu saved preset option every time es 2 you open a program and print E NOTE Configuration mi settings might not be available in Classic mode Mac OS X v10 3 1 On the File menu click 1 On the File menu click 1 Open Printer Setup Utility Print Print by selecting the hard drive clicking Applications 2
288. s you to send a print job directly to the printer memory Selection of Private Job activates the PIN field The print job can be printed only after you type a PIN in the printer control panel After the job is printed the printer removes the job from the printer memory This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing Private Job stores the print job on the hard disk or in printer RAM memory After it is released for printing the private job is immediately deleted from the printer If more copies are needed you have to reprint the job from the program If you send a second private job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing private job and you have not released the original job for printing the job will overwrite the existing job regardless of the PIN Private jobs are deleted if power to the printer is turned off EA NOTE A lock symbol next to a job name indicates that the job is private Specify that a job is private from the driver Select the Private Job option and type a four digit PIN To avoid overwriting jobs with the same name also specify a username and job name Printing a private job 1 Press Menu to enter MENUS RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted 2 Press v to select RETRIEVE JOB 3 Press to highlight your USER NAME 136 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW ENWW 10 11 12 13 Press v to select your USER
289. sage Recommended action 3 for more information see Clearing jams 4 Ifthe message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 Check the duplexer or the stapler stacker for jammed paper For more information see Jams in the stapler stacker 1 Press for detailed information about clearing the jam 2 Press and to step through the instructions 3 Ifthe message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 Press for detailed information about clearing the jam 2 Press and to step through the instructions 3 for more information see Clearing jams 4 Ifthe message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 Press for detailed information about clearing the jam 2 Press and to step through the instructions 3 For more information on clearing jams see Jams in the stapler stacker 4 Ifthe message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 Press for detailed information about clearing the jam 2 Press w to see step by step information 3 for more information see Clearing jams 4 Ifthe message persists after clearing all pages contact HP Support at http www hp com support clj4700 1 Press for detailed information about clearing the jam 2 Press a
290. samples seoncdceedcossctdceasccesscetscpsesuetisnsecdoes ssmsdiosicedespendensdshesateatieeeselonadeydacdesatepeantcs 144 PURCR OB SANDIE ina E O E 144 FIV CS C O eee a A E E A A EE E E ER 145 POCEO POTONS oen E a 145 E VENU cor eoar a er A E E EEA EE E ER 145 Using the embedded Web server cccccscccssecccsecccsececsecccsececseesegecseueeseusecseueeseasensesensetensesenueeens 146 Accessing the embedded Web server ccscccceececeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeseeecaaeesaueeseueeneeesaueeseneeaes 146 HTM IVAN OF AD ME 147 SUNOS Sn eee eee ne eae enn ne ee neo ne E EEA ee eee 147 Setting the real time ClOCK cccccccccseccceeecceseeccecccsueccceucessueecsueeseeusessueessueesssueessueessaees 148 NOWONET hanes anoien ene 148 CCIM MORK S steed serene easier Agee osteitis eiesdoee a ee E dered ba eee leds 148 Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software cccccccccsecceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaesees 149 Supported operating SYStEMS ccccecccseccceececeeeeceeeceeceseeeceeeeseecesueeseeeeseeeeseeeesaeessueetanes 149 To use the HP Easy Printer Care Software cccccccseccceseeeesseecseeceueeeseeeeseeeesueeeseeeens 149 HP Easy Printer Care Software sections ccccecccceeccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaeueesseseesaneeeseeeesaes 149 6 Color USNM COLO ae a E E E E A E E E E 152 MeMO 2 p cnt oo 0 0 iene E E E arr eee 152 PDO SSC OM aoieanna ETE EE EEE EEE E EEA AE AEA REENA 1
291. se HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the Flash Memory and try again 2 To clear the message press the key 3 If the message persists turn the printer off then on You can use Web JetAdmin to initialize the device No action necessary Contact the printer administrator to change settings Turn the printer off Press v to see step by step information BAD OPTIONAL TRAY The 500 sheet input tray is not making proper 1 Verify that the printer is on a level connection with the printer surface CONNECTION 2 Turn the printer off ENWW Control panel messages 193 Control panel message Description Recommended action Calibrating Canceling CARD SLOT X NOT FUNCTIONAL Checking paper path Checking printer CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE To continue press v alternates with CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE For help press CLEANING DISK X COMPLETE Cleaning Clearing event log Clearing paper path CLOSE FRONT COVERS For help press Close top cover The printer is calibrating The printer is in the process of canceling a job The message will continue to be displayed while the job is stopped the paper path flushed and any remaining incoming data on the active data channel is received and discarded The flash card in slot X is not working correctly The engine is turning its rollers to check for possible paper jams The engine is doing an internal t
292. seeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeeseeeeaes 163 Using HP Web Jetadimin cccccccecccssecceeceseseeeeeesaseesaeesaseesseeeseeeseeneeesaaess 163 Changing print cartridges seisen ma a a a A E e a a 164 Replacing a print cartridge cccccccceeceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeseueeseneessegesseneeseeeeaes 164 To replace the print cartridge ccc ccccecccseccceeeceeece cece eeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseueseueeeueeseeeseeeges 164 R placinNg SUPPOSE secstiinenner inner E E A a EE TES 167 overs gfe SOPPIGS Skee enna ene E TEE 167 Supply replacement guidelines cccccecccseccceeceeceseeceeecseeecseeeceeeeeseeeesaeeeseeseueeseneeseaaes 167 Making room around the printer for replacing supplies cccecccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeesseeeeaeees 167 Approximate replacement intervals for supplies 20 0 0 cece cece eecceeecceeeeseeeceeeeseeeeaeeeseneeaes 168 Replacing the stapler cartridge iccccessiasuncsegicoveorssuwsseesaacwsimceustecwudevunsdaventoueaudasa vatwuderwuraanne 168 Using the cleaning page teeters pete sass nletonn ict erred date treat eaaa beai iaaa a a ida aiaa 172 COTE QUINTA AaS eeraa A toodenstete 175 8 Problem solving Basic troubleshooting checklist ccccccsecccsscceseeceseesesceseeeceseeseuseseececsecseeeesseeeeeeeeeseesaseenseseeseeeenes 178 Factors affecting printer performance cccccceeccceeccaeeeceecaeeeseeceeeeeseececeeeeseeesseeeseeesauesseeessuseaeeeeaes 179 Trou
293. setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as SRGB wihch is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization www e Select Image optimization SRGB to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images such as GIF or JPEG files This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching for rendering SRGB bitmap images This setting has no effect on text or vector based graphics Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement e Select AdobeRGB for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB For example some digital cameras capture images in AdobeRBG and documents that are produced with Adobe PhotoShop use the AdobeRGB color space When printing from a professional software program that uses AdobeRGB it is important that you turn off the color management in the software program and allow the printer software to manage the color space e Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode To render documents properly when this option is selected you must manage color in the program in which you are working or in the operating system CAUTION Use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or in the operating system e Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects such as sepia tones T
294. specific print mode Allows you to optimize certain parameters for all jobs rather than optimizing by media type Configure device menu 55 Menu item Values Description QUICK CALIBRATE NOW FULL CALIBRATE NOW COLOR RET CLEANING INTERVAL AUTO CLEANING CREATE CLEANING PAGE PROCESS CLEANING PAGE PRE ROTATION RE TRANSFER FUSER TEMP TRAY 1 RESTORE OPTIMIZE ON 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 Off On No value to select No value to select Performs partial printer calibrations For more information see Calibrating the printer Performs all printer calibrations For more information see Calibrating the printer The COLOR RET menu item allows you to turn on or turn off the printer REt Resolution Enhancement Technology setting The default is ON Select CLEANING INTERVAL to set the interval for automatic cleaning The intervals correspond to the number of pages that the printer has printed The default is 1000 See Using the cleaning page for more information Select AUTO CLEANING to turn automatic cleaning on or off The default is Off See Using the cleaning page for more information Select CREATE CLEANING PAGE to create a cleaning page for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet 4700n printers Printers equipped with an external duplexer generate a cleaning page automatically when PROCESS CLEANING PAGE is selected See Using the cleanin
295. ssisiseridarorrininatouian iana nioa an e anaa a a daanin iaaa aeaa a 253 Pint guality defect Chart isosiskoa ha 254 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards Printer memory and TONIS ar spseiieissepns iar E A aE S EENE 260 Installing a hard disk memory and fonts cee ecee cece eeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeseaeeesseeeseeeeeeseaeeeseeeesaaees 261 installing a hard ANVE wi sccssievendsndadensaaiendinddesuensuabsensbedunnenvandouadentundiuaiendiadwascenbicowedahnensilavawen 261 Installing DDR memory DIMMS cccsicvsnatdecounrarsnaldaceesenwnus oastusteuenadeasee steciaaacartecneecneadeasewuancs 263 Installing a flash memory card cccceccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeeseeeeeseeessaeeeseeeeesaneeeas 268 ESDH MOMO srra ar E E A 21 2 To enable memory for Windows 98 and Me cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaeeees 272 To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP cccececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 272 Installing an HP Jetdirect print Server card ccccccccseeeeceeeeceeeeceeeeseeeseueeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeesseeesaneeeees 2 3 To install an HP Jetdirect print server card cc cccccccceccceeeceeece cece sees eeeaeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeeseeeaes 273 Appendix B Supplies and accessories Ordering directly through the embedded Web server for printers with network connections 278 PNUD aora E E EE E A E EEEE 279 Appendix C Service and Support Hewlett Packard limited warranty sta
296. stalled e Were recently replaced print cartridges installed correctly e Were recently installed supplies image fuser kit image transfer kit installed correctly e Is the on off switch in the on position If you cannot find solutions to printer problems in this guide see hitp www hp com supplies clj4700 For additional information on installation and setup of the printer see the getting started guide for this printer 178 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Factors affecting printer performance Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job Among these is maximum printer speed measured in pages per minute ppm Other factors that affect printing speed include the use of special media such as transparencies glossy media heavy media and custom size media printer processing time and download time The time required to download a print job from the computer and to process the job depends on the following variables e The complexity and size of graphics e The printer s I O configuration network versus parallel e The speed of the computer you are using e The amount of printer memory installed e The network operating system and configuration if applicable Printer personality PCL or PostScript 3 emulation EA NOTE Adding additional printer memory might resolve memory problems improve how the printer handles complex graphics and improve download times but it will not increase maximum printer speed ppm ra
297. stapler is jammed or out of staples the job will still print as long as the path to the stacker bin is not blocked ENWW Clearing jams 229 Media handling problems Use only media that meets HP specifications For paper specifications for this printer see Supported media weights and sizes For media ordering information see Supplies and accessories Multiple sheets Table 8 1 Printer feeds multiple sheets Cause and solution Cause Solution The input tray is overfilled Remove excess media from the input tray Print media is sticking together Remove media flex it rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over and then reload it into the tray E NOTE Do not fan media Fanning can cause static mi electricity which can cause media to stick together Media does not meet the specifications for this printer Use only media that meets HP media specifications for this printer See Supported media weights and sizes Trays are not properly adjusted Make sure that the rear media length guide indicates the length of media being used Stapler stacker Table 8 2 Resolving common stapler stacker issues Cause and solution Cause Solution e The stapler stacker does not turn on e The printer might be in sleep mode Press any control panel button to wake the printer e The stapler stacker is not stapling jobs e Ensure that the stapler stacker is firmly seated on the e The printer does not recognize the stapler stac
298. supported media e Make sure that the media you are using does not have any wrinkles or dents from handling and that the media is not contaminated with visible fingerprints or other foreign Make sure to use supported media e Make sure that the media type and size for the tray are set correctly in the control panel for the media that you are substances using e Printthe Print Quality e Make sure that the Troubleshooting Pages media is loaded correctly see Print quality and that the size guides troubleshooting and are touching the edges follow the diagnostic of the stack of media procedure listed on the first page to help isolate Make sure that the the defect to a particular media you are using component does not have any wrinkles or dents from handling and that the media is not contaminated with visible fingerprints or other foreign substances N 256 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Smeared toner Make sure to use supported media Media damage wrinkles curl creases tears Make sure that the operation and location requirements of the printer are met Make sure to use supported media Make sure that the media is loaded correctly Make sure that the media type and size for the tray are set correctly in the control panel for the media that you are using Make sure that the media you are using does not have any White areas dropouts on page Make sure that t
299. sure the envelopes fit under the tabs on the guides Printing envelopes 1 Specify Tray 1 or select the media source by size in the printer driver 2 If your software does not automatically format an envelope specify Landscape for page orientation in your software application or printer driver Use the following guidelines to set margins for return and destination addresses on Commercial 10 or DL envelopes Address type Left margin Top margin Return 5 mm 0 2 inches 5 mm 0 2 inches Destination 102 mm 4 inches 51 mm 2 inches EA NOTE For envelopes of other sizes adjust the margin settings appropriately 3 Select Print from the software application or printer driver Printing from Tray 2 or the optional trays Tray 2 and the optional paper trays each hold up to 500 sheets of standard paper or a 50 8 mm 2 in stack of labels Tray 2 stacks above the optional 500 sheet trays and when properly installed the printer detects the optional trays and shows them as options in the control panel CONFIGURE DEVICE menu The trays adjust for detectable media sizes letter legal A4 A5 JIS B5 and executive and undetectable 102 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW media sizes 8 5 x 13 and Executive JIS double Japan postcard and custom The printer automatically detects the media size in these trays based on the tray s paper guide configuration See Supported media weights and sizes CAUTION The paper path for the optional t
300. t Remove the old fuser unit from the printer e Install the new fuser unit 204 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action REPLACE STAPLER CARTRIDGE REPLACE SUPPLIES For status press v The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges REPLACE SUPPLIES Override in use alternates with lt Current status message gt REPLACE SUPPLIES To continue press v The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges REPLACE SUPPLIES ENWW e _ The stapler cartridge contains fewer than 30 staples and should not be used The stapler cartridge needs to be replaced e There is no stapler cartridge installed Multiple supplies are at the end of their useful life If the supplies affected are cartridges only printing has stopped because the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP AT OUT If the affected supplies are cartridges only printing will not continue The printer is set to continue printing even though a print cartridge has reached end of life A CAUTION Using the Override mode may result in unsatisfactory print quality HP recommends replacing the supply when the REPLACE SUPPLY message is displayed HP Supplies Premium Protection Warranty coverage ends when a supply is used in Override mode Multiple supplies are at the end of their useful life and the REPLAC
301. t turn the printer off When the process is complete the printer will automatically restart A menu selection has been saved The tray is loaded with media longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size configured for the tray The printer is in sleep mode A button press receipt of printable data or an error condition will clear this message The stapler stacker output bin is full The amber light on the stapler stacker is blinking The jam access door is open The stapler stacker cannot operate in this condition The amber light on the stapler stacker is blinking The top cover of the stacker unit is open The unit cannot function The stapler cartridge door is open The stapler stacker cannot operate in this condition The amber light on the stapler stacker is blinking The top cover of the stapler unit is open The unit cannot function No action necessary No action necessary Get your network administrator to set the user or program permissions that will allow you to print in color Press Stop when ready to stop this test Press Stop when ready to stop this test No action necessary No action necessary 1 Adjust the side and rear media guides against the paper 2 If necessary press after the tray is closed to change the paper size or type configuration to match the size or type in the tray No action necessary Remove paper from the stapler stacker output bin Close the
302. t SOURCE 10 Press or to highlight a tray 11 Press v to select the tray After selecting the tray the printer control panel returns to the SET REGISTRATION menu 12 Press to highlight PRINT TEST PAGE 13 Press v to select PRINT TEST PAGE 14 Follow the instructions on the printed page The message Printing REGISTRATION PAGE appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the registration page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the registration page Event log The event log lists the printer events including printer jams service errors and other printer conditions 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press v to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG 5 Press v to select PRINT EVENT LOG Troubleshooting information pages 181 The message Printing EVENT LOG appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the event log The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log 182 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Control panel message types ENWW Control panel messages are divided into three types depending on their severity e Status messages e Warning messages e Error messages Within the error message category some messages are ranked as Critical error messages This section explains the differences between the control panel message types Status messages Status messages reflect the current sta
303. t colors after installing a print cartridge Cause and solution Cause Solution Another print cartridge might be low Check the supplies gauge on the control panel or print a supplies status page See Printer information pages Print cartridges might be improperly installed Verify that each print cartridge is installed properly A non HP cartridge might be installed Ensure that you are using a genuine HP print cartridge Color match error Table 8 32 Printed colors do not match screen colors Cause and solution Cause Solution Extremely light screen colors are not being printed The software application might interpret extremely light colors as white If so avoid using extremely light colors Extremely dark screen colors are being printed in black The software application might interpret extremely dark colors as black If so avoid using extremely dark colors The colors on the computer screen differ from the printer On the printer driver s Color Control tab there are several output options that affect color matching between the screen and the printed page such as Color Themes and Color Options For more information see Color matching EA NOTE Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your screen These factors include print media overhead lighting software applications operating system palettes monitors and video cards and drivers 250 Chapter8 Problem solvi
304. t http www hp com go lisupplies To order supplies worldwide see http www hp com ghp buyonline html To order accessories see http www hp com go accessories ENWW 2 7 Ordering directly through the embedded Web server for printers with network connections Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server see Using the embedded Web server 1 Inthe Web browser on the computer enter the IP address for the printer The printer status window appears Or go to the URL provided in the alert e mail 2 Click Other Links 3 Click Order Supplies The browser opens to a page in which you can choose to send information about the printer to HP You also have the option to order supplies without sending the printer s information to HP 4 Select the part numbers you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen 278 AppendixB Supplies and accessories ENWW Part numbers To order supplies through the embedded Web server select the part numbers you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen Supplies accessories and part numbers Part Part number Type size Memory J6073A EIO printer hard disk Q7721A DIMM 128 MB DDR 200 pin SDRAM Q7722A DIMM 256 MB DDR 200 pin SDRAM Q7723A DIMM 512 MB DDR 200 pin SDRAM Accessories J7934A HP Jetdirect 620n fast Ethernet print server J7960A HP Jetdirect 625n Gigabit Ethernet print server J7951A HP Jetdirect ew2400 wired wirel
305. t is punctured print quality problems could result 3 Remove the used print cartridge from the printer IN y m f oe fcc a Hl LEN n B NG anf A qo qo ao ao am qo m m m N 2 4 Remove the new print cartridge from the bag Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling ENWW Changing print cartridges 165 5 Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and insert the cartridge until it is completely FLS i i e n p o 8 Ze et In w ez ay N EA NOTE The print cartridge tape seal is removed automatically when the print cartridge is installed in the printer NOTE lfa cartridge is in the wrong slot the control panel will display the message INCORRECT COLOR CARTRIDGE 6 Close the front cover and then close the top cover After a short while the control panel should display Ready 7 Installation is complete Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions 8 Ifyou are using a non HP print cartridge check the control panel for further instructions For additional help go to http www hp com support clj4700 166 Chapter7 Maintenance ENWW Replacing supplies ENWW When you use genuine HP supplies the printer automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly depleted The notification to order supplies allows ample time to or
306. t side up Facing pages are read from top to bottom on the left page then from top to bottom on the right page 4 Short edge portrait This layout is often used with clipboards Every other printed image is oriented upside down Facing pages are read continuously from top to bottom When using Windows drivers select Flip Pages to see the designated binding options Manual two sided printing If you want to print on two sides duplex on paper other than the supported sizes or weights for example paper heavier than 120 g m 32 Ib or very thin paper you will have to go to the printer and reinsert the paper manually after the first side has printed EA NOTE Damaged or previously used paper can cause paper jams and should not be used NOTE Manual two sided printing is not supported for Windows 98 and systems that use the PS driver Two sided duplex printing 127 To manually print on two sides duplex 1 Ensure that the printer driver is configured to allow manual duplexing For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers In the printer driver select Allow Manual Duplex From the application open the printer driver Select the appropriate size and type On the Finishing tab click Print on Both Sides or Print on Both Sides Manually p r The default binding option is to bind on the long edge of the paper in portrait layout To change the setting click the Finishing tab
307. t types of solutions available go to http www hp com go gsc EA NOTE Flash memory cards adhere to Compact Flash specifications and size A CAUTION Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the printer The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card If you install a camera type flash memory card the control panel displays a message asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card If you choose to reformat the card all data on the card will be lost You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often print complex graphics or PS documents or use many downloaded fonts Additional memory also allows the printer to print multiple collated copies at the maximum speed E NOTE Single inline memory modules SIMMs dual in line memory modules DIMMs used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with this printer NOTE To order SODIMMs see Supplies and accessories Before ordering additional memory see how much memory is currently installed by printing a configuration page Printing a configuration page 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION 5 Press v to print the configuration page 260 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards ENWW Installing a hard disk memory and fonts You can install more memory fo
308. tallable Options menu ENWW Printer drivers 21 Printer drivers for Macintosh computers 22 The printer comes with printer driver software that uses a printer language to communicate with the printer Printer drivers provide access to printer features such as printing on custom sized paper resizing documents and inserting watermarks Supported printer drivers A Macintosh printer driver and the necessary PPD files are included with the printer If the printer driver that you want is not on the printer CD check the installation notes and the late breaking readme files to see if the printer driver is supported If it is not supported contact the manufacturer or distributor of the software program that you are using and request a driver for the printer EA NOTE The most recent drivers are available at www hp com Gaining access to the printer drivers Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from your computer Operating System To change the settings for all To change the print job default To change the configuration print jobs until the software settings for example turn on settings for example add a program is closed Print on Both Sides by default physical option such as a tray or turn on or off a driver feature such as Allow Manual Duplexing Mac OS 9 1 and9 2 1 On the File menu click 1 On the File menu click 1 Click the desktop printer Print Print icon 2 Change any settings that 2 A
309. te of purchase and description of the problem You can also find support on the Internet at httpo www hp com Click the support amp drivers block Software utilities drivers and electronic information Visit http Awww hp com go clj4700_ software for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer The Web page for the drivers might be in English but you can download the drivers themselves in several languages Call See the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies In the United States supplies can be ordered from htip www hp com sbso product supplies In Canada supplies can be ordered from http www hp ca catalog supplies In Europe supplies can be ordered from http www hp com supplies In Asia Pacific supplies can be ordered from http www hp com paper Accessories can be ordered from hitp www hp com go accessories Call 1 800 538 8787 U S or 1 800 387 3154 Canada HP service information To locate HP Authorized Dealers call 1 800 243 9816 U S or 1 800 387 3867 Canada For service for your product call the customer support number for your country region See the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer HP service agreements Call 1 800 835 4747 U S or 1 800 268 1221 Canada Extended Service 1 800 446 0522 HP support and information for Macintosh computers Visit http www hp com go macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and HP subscr
310. te of the printer They inform you of normal printer operation and require no interaction to clear them They change as the state of the printer changes Whenever the printer is ready not busy and has no pending warning messages the status message Ready is displayed if the printer is online Warning messages Warning messages inform you of data and print errors These messages typically alternate with the Ready or Status messages and remain displayed until the v button is pressed If CLEARABLE WARNINGS is set to JOB in the printer s configuration menu these messages are cleared by the next print job Error messages Error messages communicate that some action must be performed such as adding paper or clearing a paper jam Some error messages are auto continuable if AUTO CONTINUE ON the printer will continue normal operation after displaying an auto continuable error message for 10 seconds EA NOTE Any button pressed during the 10 second display of an auto continuable error message will override the auto continue feature and the function of the button pressed will take precedence For example pressing the Menu button will display the main menu Critical error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the printer off and then on These messages are not affected by the AUTO CONTINUE setting If a critical error persists service is required The following table lis
311. tely settles in the output bin before removing it Reset the printer and print the document again Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it Replace the print media Remove the top sheet of media If the media is heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib it might not be picked from the tray Replace the media This media does not separate easily You might need to feed single sheets from Tray 1 Check the printer control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies See Replacing supplies for more information Replace the print media Media should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment NOTE If the printer continues to jam contact HP Customer Support or your authorized HP service provider For more information see http www hp com support clj4700 Problem solving ENWW Clearing jams Each section below corresponds with a jam message that might appear on the control panel Use these procedures to clear the jam Jam in Tray 1 1 Open Tray 1 2 Remove loaded paper from Tray 1 3 Reload paper in Tray 1 and check to make sure the media is loaded correctly E NOTE Do not load media above the fill tabs 4 Confirm that the guides are in the correct position iili f LF pe A os oN ALR N d l D 5 To contin
312. tement cccccccecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeesaeeesaeeeaaneeseeesneeaeeesees 284 Print cartridge limited warranty statement cccccceccsececeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeaseeseneeseneesaeeeseeesaneeeaes 285 Fuser and transfer unit limited warranty statement cccccccsecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseneesaaees 286 HP maintenance agreements sciserisscnicasni a aa a a aa aaaea daa eadi 287 On site service agreements cccccseccccssccceeseeceaeeeceueeeceueeecseeeceueeeceuseessaeeesseeesseaeeesseeeess 287 Priority on site service sien srncwircncncnesnceeiwcedianeiniantatanaecnmlabiawdeswucdinixeiadeadlunnedanoudas 287 Next day on site service ccccccccscccsseecseeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeenaneesnsensnesnaneenanes 287 Weekly volume on site service nnnnnnsennnnreennnernsnnrnrnsrrrsnrrsrrrrnresrrnnnrennne 287 Appendix D Printer specifications FAY SICA GING SIONS sireno O A E E E 290 Electrical specifications aasarin a aiaa aaa aa a aa RAe aa aaa aA aaa aiaa adaa 291 ENWW xiii A COUSIC OMISSIONS perosninanTe ee ene eee ene ne an Ei 292 Environmental specifications ccccccecccseccceeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeseeeeseeeeseaeeeseeessaeeesaeessueesseeeesneesaneees 293 Appendix E Regulatory information XIV FCC regulations iss css ated discerned E A ac sn gectoe anion cag aaipanecuneneand E 296 FOG regulations sssini a EaR EA RAR 296 Environmental product stewardshi
313. ter HP Color LaserJet 567 55 17 0 3 4700 HP Color LaserJet 567 55 17 0 3 4700n HP Color LaserJet 567 55 17 0 3 4700dn HP Color LaserJet 591 63 18 0 3 4700dtn HP Color LaserJet 623 66 18 0 3 4700ph NOTE Values are subject to change See http www hp cpm support clj4700 for current information Power reported is the highest value measured using all standard voltages 3Maximum heat dissipation for all models in Ready mode is 225 BTU hour Default time from Ready mode to Sleep mode is 30 minutes Recovery time from Sleep mode to start of printing is less than 15 seconds ENWW Electrical specifications 291 Acoustic emissions Sound Power Level Declared Per ISO 9296 Printing 31 ppm letter 2 3 Lwag 6 7 Bels A 67 dB A Ready Lwag 4 7 Bels A 47 dB A Sound Pressure Level Bystander Position Declared Per ISO 9296 Printing 31 ppm letter 2 3 Loam 00 dB A Ready Loam 31 GB A EA NOTE Values are subject to change See http www hp com support clj4700 for current information 2Configuration tested Base printer simplex printing on A4 paper 3HP Color LaserJet 4700 speed 31 ppm letter and 30 ppm A4 paper 292 AppendixD Printer specifications ENWW Environmental specifications Specification Recommended Allowed Temperature 17 to 25 C 62 6 to 77 F 15 to 30 C 59 to 86 F Humidity 30 to 70 relative humidity RH 10 to 80 RH Altitude N A 0 to 2600 m 0 to 8530 ft
314. ter or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later The embedded Web server works when the printer is connected to an IP based network The embedded Web server does not support IPX based printer connections You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server For more information about the HP embedded Web server see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide You can find this guide on the CD ROM included with the printer Accessing the embedded Web server In a supported Web browser on your computer type the IP address for the printer To find the IP address print a configuration page For more information about printing a configuration page see Printer information pages EA NOTE Once you open the URL you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the i future 1 The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the printer the Information tab the Settings tab and the Networking tab Click the tab that you want to view 2 See the following sections for more information about each tab 146 Chapter5 Managing the printer ENWW ENWW Information tab The Information pages group consists of the following pages Device Status This page displays the printer status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies with 0 representing that a supply is empty The page also shows the type and size of print media set for each tray To change the default settings click Change Setti
315. tes e _ In China ftp www hp com cn support clj4700 e In Japan ftp www jon hp com support clj4700 In Korea http www hp co kr support clj4 700 In Taiwan http www hp com tw support clj4700 or the local driver Web site http www dds com tw To order supplies United States http www hp com go lijsupplies e Worldwide http www hp com ghp buyonline html To order accessories e http www hp com go accessories User guide links For the latest version of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer user guide go to http www hp com support clj4700 Where to look for more information Several references are available for use with this printer See http Awww hp com support clj4700 Setting up the printer Start Guide Provides step by step instructions for installing and setting up the printer HP Driver Pre Configuration Guide For detailed information about configuring printer drivers go to hitp www hp com go hpdpc_sw 2 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW ENWW HP Embedded Web Server User Guide Information about using the embedded Web server is available on the CD ROM that came with the printer Accessory and Consumable Installation Guides Provides step by step instructions for installing the printer s accessories and consumables Supplied with the printer s optional accessories and consumables Using the printer CD ROM User Guide Provides detailed information on using and troublesho
316. tes ademas E Sitet ane nae este wes 112 Using features in the printer driver cccccescccesecceeseeceeueecceeeceueeeceeecseuseceueeeeaueessaeessaeessesseeseaees 113 Creating and using quick sets 2 csaiee titel teas Ge hota eed Seeedipc te 113 Creating and USING WateErMalKkS cccccsececceseccceeeecceeecsececsueeeceueesseeessaeeeseaeeesaeeesseeeess 114 RESIZING GOCUINGIUS cerns a a a eos Ra 114 Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver cccccccceecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 115 Using different paper covers 20 0 ccccccccccecceseecceeecceeeeceaeecseeeseeeessuceseueesaueesaeeeseueesaeeesaeeesags 115 Panting a blank Ist page asror a a a E ectaeeelut ds 115 Printing multiple pages on one sheet Of PAPE nennnnnnnnnnnnnnninennnrnnnnsrnnnrnnrnnrrerrsrrenenni 115 Printing Oi both sides Of the Papen anisini aa a a a 116 To print on both sides by using the duplex printing accessory ccc cee 116 To print on both sides manually cccceecceececeeeceseceseeseeseceeecseeeeaeesneesneeees 117 Layout options for printing on both sides cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeneeens 117 Setting the stapling options cccccecccsssccecseeecceeseecesseecseaeecseaeecseueesesaeeeseseeesseseessaeeeess 118 Seting The Color options semino a E adda neacouseddaeemesadene 118 Using the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog bOX cece cceecceseeeceeeeeca
317. teway 1 ree Ee a p prp r lt A A O e pr 14 15 16 17 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight I O Press v to select I O Press to highlight the JETDIRECT menu Press v to select the JETDIRECT menu Press v to highlight TCP IP Press v to select TCP IP Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS Press v to select MANUAL SETTINGS Press to highlight DEFAULT GATEWAY Press v to select DEFAULT GATEWAY E NOTE The first set of the three sets of numbers shows the default settings If there is not a number highlighted a highlighted empty underscore appears Press a or to increase or decrease the number for configuring DEFAULT GATEWAY Press v to move to the next set of numbers Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the correct subnet mask is entered Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state Disabling network protocols optional By factory default all supported network protocols are enabled Disabling unused protocols has the following benefits Decreases printer generated network traffic Prevents unauthorized users from printing to the printer Provides only pertinent information on the configuration page Allows the printer control panel to display protocol specific error and warning messages Ex NOTE TCP IP configuration cannot be disabled on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer 82 Chapter 3 I O con
318. the card in the first slot is shown The default is OFF Disables or restricts color use The default is ENABLE COLOR To use the COLOR IF ALLOWED setting set up user permissions by using the embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server This menu item establishes how the printer switches from color to monochrome black and white mode for maximum performance and print cartridge life AUTO will reset the printer to the factory default setting The default is AUTO Select MOSTLY COLOR PAGES if nearly all of your print jobs are color with high page coverage Select MOSTLY BLACK PAGES if you print mostly monochrome print jobs or a combination of color and monochrome print jobs Allows you to specify settings for the tray selection behavior This setting allows you to configure the trays to behave like trays in some previous HP printers and to configure two sided printing behavior for pre printed paper The default for USE REQUESTED TRAY is EXCLUSIVELY ENWW Configure device menu 57 Menu item Values Description SLEEP DELAY WAKE TIME DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS PERSONALITY CLEARABLE WARNINGS AUTO CONTINUE REPLACE SUPPLIES DUPLEX BLANK PAGES IMAGE ROTATION 1 Minute 15 MINUTES 30 MINUTES 45 MINUTES 60 MINUTES 90 MINUTES 2 HOURS 4 HOURS A list of day and hour variables appears Range is 1 through 10 AUTO ON STOP AT OUT STOP AT LOW OVERRIDE AT OUT Th
319. the same or similar name IP address or Rendezvous hostname address or Rendezvous host name Verify that the name IP address might have received your print job or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the 246 Chapter8 Problem solving Table 8 27 Problems with Mac OS X continued A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted Cause Solution printer name IP address or Rendezvous host name in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility An encapsulated PostScript EPS file does not print with the correct fonts Cause Solution This problem occurs with some programs e Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to the printer before printing e Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding You are unable to print from a third party USB card Cause Solution This error occurs when the software for USB printers is not installed When adding a third party USB card you might need the Apple USB Adapter Card Support software The most current version of this software is available from the Apple Web site E When connected with a USB cable the printer does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected Cause Solution This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware Software troubleshooting component e Check that your Macintosh supports USB e Verify that your Macintosh operating
320. the stapler stacker is installed the printer automatically rotates printed images 180 on all paper sizes regardless of whether the job is stapled or not If you are printing on paper that requires a specific orientation such as letterhead preprinted or prepunched paper or paper with watermarks make sure that the paper is loaded correctly in the tray For single sided printing and stapling from Tray 1 load the paper face down with the logo toward you For single sided printing and stapling from all other trays load the paper face up with the logo toward the rear of the printer For duplex printing and stapling from Tray 1 load the paper face up with the logo toward the rear of the printer For duplex printing and stapling from all other trays load the paper face down with the logo toward you 132 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW Special printing situations ENWW Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media Printing a different first page Use the following procedure to print the first page of a document on a different media type than the rest of the document for example to print the first page of a document on letterhead paper and the rest on plain paper 1 From your application or printer driver specify a tray for the first page and another tray for the remaining pages For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers 2 Load the special media into the tray that you specif
321. tic and or manual For instructions see the online Help for the printer driver For more information see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers Once the two sided printing option is shown select the appropriate two sided printing options in the printer driver software Two sided printing options include page and binding orientation For more information about options for binding two sided printing jobs see Options for binding two sided printing jobs Automatic two sided printing is not supported for certain media types including transparencies envelopes labels heavy extra heavy cardstock and HP Tough paper The maximum weight paper for automatic duplex printing is 120 g m 32 Ib bond Automatic two sided printing supports letter A4 8 5 x 13 legal executive and JIS B5 paper sizes Manual two sided printing can support all sizes and more types of media Transparencies envelopes and labels are not supported If both automatic and manual two sided printing are enabled the printer will automatically print on two sides if the size and type are supported by the duplexer Otherwise it will manually duplex For best results avoid two sided printing with rough textured heavy weight media To load pre printed forms and letterhead into Tray 1 load them face up with the top edge of the page facing away from you When duplex printing load pre printed forms and letterhead into Tray 2 or an optional 50
322. ting ENWW Factors affecting printer performance 179 Troubleshooting information pages From the printer control panel you can print pages that can help diagnose printer problems The procedures for printing the following information pages are described here e Configuration page E NOTE Itis recommended that you print a configuration page before beginning any printer diagnostics e Paper path test page e Registration page e Event log Configuration page Use the configuration page to view or restore current printer settings to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories such as DIMMs paper handling accessories trays and printer languages 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION 5 Press v to select PRINT CONFIGURATION The message Printing CONFIGURATION appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the configuration page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing E NOTE Ifthe printer is configured with an HP Jetdirect print server duplexer or stapler stacker an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices Paper path test page The paper path test page is useful for testing the paper handling features of the printer You can define the paper path you want to test by selecting the source destina
323. tion and other options available on the printer 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press v to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press to highlight PAPER PATH TEST 5 Press v to select PAPER PATH TEST The message Performing PAPER PATH TEST appears on the display until the printer finishes the paper path test The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the paper path test page 180 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW ENWW Registration page The registration page prints a horizontal arrow and a vertical arrow that show how far from center an image can be printed on the page You can set registration values for a tray so that an image on the back and front of a page is centered Setting the registration also allows edge to edge printing to be set to within approximately 2 mm 0 08 inch of all edges of the paper Image placement varies slightly for each tray Perform the registration procedure for each tray 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY Press v to select PRINT QUALITY Press to highlight SET REGISTRATION ee SS e N Press v to select SET REGISTRATION Ex NOTE You can select a tray by specifying a SOURCE The default SOURCE is Tray 2 To set the registration for Tray 2 go to step 12 Otherwise proceed to the next step 8 Press to highlight SOURCE 9 Press v to selec
324. to open the Printer Info dialog box In the pop up menu select Printer Model and then in the pop up menu in which Generic is selected select the correct PPD for the printer 6 Print a test page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed If installation fails reinstall the software If this fails see the installation notes or late breaking readme files on the printer CD or the flyer that came in the printer box or go to http Awww hp com support clj4700 for help or more information EA NOTE The icon on the Mac OS 9 x desktop looks generic All of the print panels appear in the Print dialog box with each software program To remove software from Macintosh operating systems To remove the software from a Macintosh computer drag the PPD files to the trash can 26 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh Use the HP Printer Utility to configure and maintain a printer from a Mac OS X v10 2 8 or v10 3 computer This section describes several functions that you can perform through the HP Printer Utility Opening the HP Printer Utility The process that you use to start the HP Printer Utility depends on the Macintosh operating system that you are using To open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X v10 2 8 1 Open the Finder and then click Applications 2 Click Library and then click Printers 3 Click hp and then click Utilities 4 Double click HP
325. ts and describes control panel messages in alphabetical order Control panel message types 183 Control panel messages Message listing Control panel message Description Recommended action 10 90 XY REPLACE COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press 10 92 YY CARTRIDGES NOT ENGAGED 10 XX YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR alternates with For help press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges 11 X INTERNAL CLOCK ERROR To continue press v 13 XX YY EXTERNAL OUTPUT DEVICE PAPER JAM 13 XX YY JAM IN DUPLEX PATH For help press A color cartridge is out of toner and needs to Replace the color cartridge be replaced The print cartridge is not seated properly in the printer The printer cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag or at least one memory tag is missing The following control panel messages correspond to the color of the print cartridge 10 00 00 black print cartridge 10 00 01 cyan print cartridge 10 00 02 magenta print cartridge 10 00 03 yellow print cartridge This message is displayed when there is a problem with the real time clock on the formatter board XX 01 Dead clock battery XX 02 Dead real time clock There is a jam in the stapler stacker There is a jam in the duplex path Remove and reinstall the print cartridge _ Turn the printer off then on Press for more information
326. ts that are contained in the EPS file to the printer before printing a Your document is not printing with New York Geneva or Monaco fonts Cause Solution The printer might be substituting fonts Click Options in the Page Setup dialog box to clear substituted fonts You are unable to print from a third party USB card Cause Solution This error occurs when the software for USB printers is not installed When adding a third party USB card you might need the Apple USB Adapter Card Support software The most current version of this software is available from the Apple Web site 244 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW Table 8 26 Problems with Mac OS 9 x continued When connected with a USB cable the printer does not appear in the Desktop Printer Utility or the Apple System Profiler after the driver is selected Cause This problem is caused by either a software or hardware component Solution Software troubleshooting e Check that your Macintosh supports USB e Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS 9 1 or 9 2 e Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software from Apple Hardware troubleshooting NOTE The iMac and Blue G3 desktop Macintosh systems meet all of the requirements to connect to a USB device e Check that the printer is turned on e Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly e Check that you are using the appropriate high speed USB cable e Ensur
327. turns off trapping adaptive halftoning and color REt 160 Chapter6 Color ENWW Maintenance This chapter describes ways to maintain your printer The following topics are covered e Managing print cartridges e Changing print cartridges e Replacing supplies e Using the cleaning page e Configuring alerts ENWW 161 Managing print cartridges Be sure to use genuine HP print cartridges for the best printing results This section provides information on proper use and storage of HP print cartridges It also provides information about using non HP print cartridges HP print cartridges When you use a genuine new HP print cartridge you can obtain the following supplies information e Percentage of supplies remaining e Estimated number of pages remaining e Number of pages printed EA NOTE See Part numbers for cartridge ordering information Non HP print cartridges Hewlett Packard Company cannot recommend use of non HP print cartridges either new or remanufactured Because they are not genuine HP products HP cannot influence their design or control their quality Service or repair required as a result of using a non HP print cartridge will not be covered under the printer warranty When you use a non HP print cartridge certain features such as remaining toner volume data may not be available as a result of using this non HP supply If the non HP print cartridge was sold to you as a genuine HP product see HP fraud hotline
328. tware for MGTWOIK Scie dean nissuiciosntuic nels sian dntweseneinsionmenentieehanaiznmnsideesbdenwadedlns achednilaviendenatiduaededadebienenils 16 AP WV OD Jeta esia EE EEA a eset 16 RA E E ce vee sce ees E T 17 Ea E e A A E E A E E E N E ET 17 HP Easy Printer Care Software ccccccsssccccescecceececceseeceeseecseaeesssaeeesneeessaes 17 Embedded Web server cccccsccececeeccececueceeeseueceecaeecseceeesaseceeesaeeeensaseneeesaes 17 OCS cases series ornce E EE 18 Other components and utilities cece ceeccceeecceeeeceeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeesseeesseeesseeetees 18 Primer ONY ON Se osere E A O E donde eencecencucacusueuasesaaecoube casio aedewsec 19 DUD DOME printer CIV OVS cca ccessececead cncznn aiani ia aaa a aia EA e aiaa 19 ENWW Additonal drivers oc diecctenecaen coe cte eset arinean EE AEE EAEE NEATA 19 2 Control panel vi Select the correct printer driver cccccccecccceeccseeeceeeecceeeeceeceseeceseeceseeeeseeeeseeeeseeesseeeesaneesees 20 Printer driver Help Windows cccccsccccesseeceeseecceseccceuseeceaeeecsaeeecseueessaseeeceaeessagsesseeeeses 20 Gaining access to the printer drivers cccccceceeeceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeesseeeesaeeesaeeeeseeesseeeens 20 Printer drivers for Macintosh computers cccccccccceecceeccceeeeceeeceeeeecueeeeeeeeseeeseueeseueessusesseeeeaneeesaeees 22 Supported Printer AVES 20 2 0 cece cece cc ececeececeeeeceeeeceeeeseeeceaeeseeecsaeesue
329. u click Print 2 Change the settings that you want on the various pop up menus 3 On the Presets pop up menu click Save as and type a name for the preset These settings are saved in the Presets menu To use the new settings you must select the saved preset option every time you open a program and print 1 On the File menu click Print 2 Change the settings that you want on the various pop up menus 3 On the Presets pop up menu click Save as and type a name for the preset These settings are saved in the Presets menu To use the new settings you must select the saved preset option every time you open a program and print 1 A Click Start click Settings and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes Right click the HP Color LaserJet 4700 icon and then select Properties Click the Device Settings tab Click the desktop printer icon From the Printing menu click Change Setup In the Finder on the Go menu click Applications Open Utilities and then open Print Center Click on the print queue On the Printers menu click Show Info Click the Installable Options menu NOTE Configuration settings might not be available in Classic mode Open Printer Setup Utility by selecting the hard drive clicking Applications clicking Utilities then double clicking Printer Setup Utility Click on the print queue On the Printers menu click Show Info Click the Ins
330. ue printing press and then press v ENWW Clearing jams 213 Jam in Tray 2 or optional trays 1 Pull out the tray indicated and place it on a flat surface Make sure that the paper guides are in the correct position Remove any partially fed media Grasp the media by both corners and pull down E NOTE Use Tray 1 to avoid jams with heavier paper Inspect the media path to ensure that it is clear EA NOTE Ifthe media tears make sure that all media fragments are removed from the paper path before resuming printing For jams that occur in an optional tray check the trays above for jams as well For example if the jam occurs in Tray 4 also open Tray 2 and Tray 3 and remove any jammed paper 214 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW 5 Check to make sure the media is loaded correctly Insert the tray into the printer Make sure all trays are completely closed cA lt lt L QS Kee Jams in top cover area Jams in the top cover occur in of the areas indicated in the figures below Use the procedures in this section to clear a jam in this area a ee L oye RE 9 Ore X
331. untena ewer S A E yeas cde toin endare 73 Setting replace supplies response ccceecccececesecceccceececeeeseueeseeeseeeseeeseeesaues 74 Order ataa EE N N eroaa iethchecdaas a ESTAA 74 Setting order at response ccccsecccceseecceeeecceseeceesecceaeeeceuseessueeeseseesseueesseeeesas 14 COlOrSUDDIY OU isanne a a a aniseed a 74 Setting color supply out response cece ceccce eee ceeceeeeeceeeeseeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeseeeesaeetens 75 SI AIIM OVI srs accesses cacope peared cceeabec oecern ate vrei c erteumetucean cease Weenie mere va dereesiae samara nag ascent mateete 15 Setting jam recovery FESPONSE cccccseccceececsececeececeuceseuceseueessceesueessueessueesaees 75 FA SK aeria sist caret teebe arsenate a S an eee A A 76 Changing RAM disk behavior cccccccseeeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeesueeeeeeaeeeesseeeesaeneessanees 76 Vil 3 EAU AC seascctes ts aecnaten sean silaretunptmeleaueiopantadsiedsam heaps samecbnneidaat usta sanas arama nan waabuuapisans 76 Selecting the language cccceccccseecccceececceeeeecseeceeuseceeaeeeseaeeecseueeessueeessageenes 76 Selecting the language if the display is in a language you do not understand 77 Using the printer control panel in Shared environments ccceccseeceeeceeeeeeeceeecaeeseeeseeesueeseeeseeeaees 78 I O configuration Network configuration ee 80 Configuring TCP IP parameters ccccccceccceceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesseeeees
332. uration software solutions see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide You can find this guide on the CD ROM included with the printer HP Web Jetadmin HP Web Jetadmin allows you to manage HP Jetdirect connected printers within your intranet using a Web browser HP Web Jetadmin is a browser based management tool and should be installed only on a single network administration server It can be installed and run on these systems e Fedora Core and SuSe Linux e Windows 2000 Professional Server and Advanced Server e Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1 e Windows Server 2003 When installed on a host server HP Web Jetadmin can be accessed by any client through a supported web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 and 6 0 or Netscape Navigator 7 0 HP Web Jetadmin has the following features e Task oriented user interface provides configurable views saving network managers significant time e Customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function viewed or used e Instant e mail notification of hardware failure low supplies and other printer problems now route to different people e Remote installation and management from anywhere using only a standard Web browser e Advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network without manually entering each printer into a database e Simple integration into enterprise management packages 16 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW E
333. ure these parameters from installation software the printer control panel the embedded Web server or management software such as HP Web Jetadmin or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh EA NOTE For more information about using the embedded Web server see Using the embedded Web server For more information about supported networks and network configuration tools see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server is installed This section contains the following instructions for configuring network parameters from the printer control panel e Configuring TCP IP parameters e Disabling unused network protocols Configuring TCP IP parameters You can use the printer control panel to configure these TCP IP parameters e P address 4 bytes e Subnet mask 4 bytes e Default gateway 4 bytes Manually configuring TCP IP parameters from the printer control panel Use manual configuration to set an IP address subnet mask and default gateway Setting an IP address 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight I O Press v to select I O Press to highlight the JETDIRECT menu Press v to select the JETDIRECT menu Press to highlight TCP IP yr a Fr a SS UP Press v to select TCP IP m Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS Press v to select MA
334. urer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP Color LaserJet 4700 4700n 4700dn 4700dtn 4700ph Product numbers Q7491A Q7492A Q7493A Q7494A Q7495A including accessories Q7499A Q7033A Q7505A Regulatory Model Number BOISB 0404 00 Product Options All Toner Cartridge Q5950A Q5951A Q5952A Q5953A conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 60950 1 2001 EN60950 1 2001 IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 A2 EN 60825 1 1994 A11 A2 Class 1 Laser LED Product GB4943 2001 EMC CISPR 22 1997 EN 55022 1998 Class B 3 EN 61000 3 2 2000 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 2001 EN 55024 1998 A1 amendment FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B ICES 003 Issue 4 GB9254 1998 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Annex II and carries the CE Marking accordingly The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 3Except clause 9 5 which is not yet in effect 4For regulatory purposes this pro
335. ustments or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide could result in exposure to hazardous radiation Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements Conforme a la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagn tiques CEM EMI statement Korea VCCI statement Japan CO EB L ARUBSESERES BEMAMBS VCCI OR ITLROCDTFABIGRRNEECT CO BIL RERRCHATSCE ABMWELTHNETAS COHBAIVAPTFLEV ALU SRICMHELT Asha SMBs sFRMOTCEMBVET AVR eR AA IXGED TEL URYRUELTEALY AC cordset statement Japan Nmd ASAE BRAKES RSL ASAT BS IRI K IL HHO san ClKEAMWRECA Safety statements 301 302 Appendix E Laser Statement for Finland Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP Color LaserJet 4700 4700n 4700dn 4700dtn 4700ph laserkirjoitin on k ytt j n kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa k yt ss kirjoittimen suojakotelointi est lasers teen p syn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on m ritetty standardin EN 60825 1 1994 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle nakymattomalle lasersateilylle VARNING Om apparaten anvands pa annat satt an i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anvandaren uts ttas for osynlig laserstralning som verskrider gr nsen for laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP C
336. vary 2 Print cartridge 34 3 mm 1 35 inches 3 Print cartridge or transfer roller if the defect occurs in only one color the defective part is the print cartridge if the defect occurs in all colors the defective part is the ETB 37 7 mm 1 48 inches 4 Print cartridge 42 7 mm 1 68 inches 5 ETB 75 mm 2 95 inches 6 Fuser 76 0 mm 2 99 inches 7 Fuser 81 0 mm 3 19 inches 8 Print cartridge 94 2 mm 3 71 inches To confirm that a print cartridge is the problem insert a print cartridge from another HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer if one is available before ordering a new print cartridge If the defect repeats at 94 0 mm 3 75 inch intervals try replacing the print cartridge before replacing the fuser Print quality defect chart Use the examples in the print quality defect chart to determine which print quality problem you are experiencing and then see the corresponding pages to find information that can help you troubleshoot 254 Chapter8 Problem solving ENWW the problem For the latest information and problem solving procedures go to hittp www hp com support clj4700 EA NOTE The print quality defect chart assumes the use of letter or A4 size media that has moved through the printer short edge first portrait orientation An image with no defects Horizontal lines or streaks Misaligned colors e Make sure that the e Calibrate the printer operation and location requirements of the printer
337. vices This option does not appear if no mass storage devices are installed 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT FILE DIRECTORY 5 Press v to select PRINT FILE DIRECTORY The message Printing FILE DIRECTORY appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the file directory page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the file directory page PCL or PS font list Use the font lists to see which fonts are currently installed in the printer The font lists also show which fonts are resident on an optional hard disk accessory or flash DIMM 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT PCL FONT LIST or PRINT PS FONT LIST 5 Press v to select PRINT PCL FONT LIST or PRINT PS FONT LIST The message Printing FONT LIST appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the font list page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the font list page Event log The event log lists the printer events including printer jams service errors and other printer conditions 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press v to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG 5 Press v to select PRINT EVENT LOG The message Printing EVENT LOG appears on t
338. was unsuccessful because the file system is full The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it No action necessary When the page is printed follow the instructions printed on the cleaning page to process the page Press to continue printing To change press v and follow the time and date prompts No action necessary No action necessary 1 To clear the message press the key 2 Ifthe message persists remove and re install the ElO disk drive 3 Turn the printer back on 4 Ifthe message still persists replace the EIO disk drive 1 Toclear the message press the key 2 If the message persists turn the printer off then on 3 Ifthe message reappears there may be a problem with the software application 1 Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the EIO disk drive or delete the stored job from the printer control panel 2 To clear the message press the key 3 Ifthe message persists turn the printer off then on 1 To enable writing to the disk turn off write protection using HP Web Jetadmin 2 Toclear the message press the key 3 If the message persists turn the printer off and then on ENWW Control panel messages 195 Recommended action Control panel message Description EIO DISK X NOT FUNCTIONAL For help press EIO X disk initializing EIO X disk spinning up Event Log Empty Genuine HP sup
339. y 7 RAM disk setting behavior 76 recycling print cartridge 297 reducing documents 114 registration page printing 181 regulations FCC 296 replace color supplies reporting 73 resets menu 62 resizing documents 114 restricting color printing 148 158 249 retrieve job menu 50 RGB samples printing 144 S safety statements AC cordset Japan 301 Canadian DOC 301 Japanese VCCI 301 Korean EMI 301 laser safety 301 laser safety for Finland 302 scaling documents 114 310 Index security page 147 servers configuring 147 service agreements 287 Services tab 119 settings driver presets 121 embedded Web server 147 quick sets 113 show address 65 sleep delay changing settings 69 disabling 70 enabling 70 time 69 sleep mode 69 software applications 18 HP Easy Printer Care 17 installing 13 macintosh 24 networks 16 uninstalling 15 utilities 17 special media printing 109 special situations blank back cover 133 custom sized media 133 different first page 133 printing 133 specifications acoustic 292 dimensions 290 electrical 291 humidity 293 temperature 293 stapler jams 227 selecting at control panel 131 selecting from application 130 stapler cartridge replacing 168 stapler stacker configuring 129 indicator lights 43 jams 220 221 job offset 131 menu 59 paper orientation 132 printing to 130 stapling 129 stapling in applications 130 stapling options 118 status e mail alerts 147 stopping a print
340. y Do not overfill the tray because the printer might not pick up the paper NOTE Ifyou are duplex printing see Two sided duplex printing for loading instructions 4 Slide the media width guides in making sure that they gently touch the paper Insert the tray into the printer 5 Insert the tray into the printer The printer will display the tray s type and size configuration To specify custom dimensions or if the type is not correct press v and follow the prompts To enter specific dimensions or change the size selection from ANY CUSTOM to CUSTOM see Configuring a tray to match print job settings Ss i ARL 6 Ifthe configuration is correct press gt to clear the message 108 Chapter4 Printing tasks ENWW Printing on special media Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media ENWW NOTE Special media such as envelopes transparencies custom size paper or heavy media greater than 120 g m is used in Tray 1 To print on any special media use the following procedure 2 Zz Load the media in the paper tray When the printer prompts you for the paper type select the correct media type for the paper loaded in the tray For example select GLOSSY when loading HP Color Laser Glossy Photo Paper In the software application or the printer driver set the media type to match the media type that is loaded in the paper tray NOTE For the best print quality always verify that the media ty
341. you receive may vary according to local standards HP will not alter form fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country region to country region state to state or province to province TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
342. you to set the point at which you are reminded to order new supplies The point is measured in terms of percent remaining The allowable range is 0 100 The default is 15 Setting order at response 1 es we aS rf SS F Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight ORDER AT Press v to select ORDER AT Press a or v to select the appropriate setting Press v to set the selection Press Menu Color supply out There are two options for this menu item The default is STOP STOP causes the printer to stop printing until the empty color supply is replaced AUTOCONTINUE BLACK allows the printer to continue printing using black toner only when a color supply is empty A warning message displays on the control panel when the printer is in this mode Printing in this mode is allowed only for a specific number of pages After that the printer will pause printing until you replace the empty color supply 74 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Setting color supply out response 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight COLOR SUPPLY OUT Press v to select COLOR SUPPLY OUT Press a or w to select the appropriate setting SSS
343. you want to order a certain item click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list NOTE Ifyou use a dial up connection and did not connect to the Internet when you first opened the HP Easy Printer Care Software you must connect before you can visit these Web sites Shop Online for Supplies button Opens the HP supplies Web site in a new browser window If you have checked the Order check box for any items the information about those items can be transferred to the Web site Print Shopping List button Prints the information for the supplies that have the Order check box selected Email Shopping List button Creates a text list of items that have the Order check box selected The list can be copied into an e mail message that you send to your supplier Alerts on or off Activates or deactivates the alerts feature for a certain printer When alerts appear Sets when you want alerts to appear either when you are printing to that particular printer or anytime there is a printer event Alert event type Sets whether you want alerts for only critical errors or for any error including continuable errors Notification type Sets what type of alert should appear pop up message or system tray alert and e mail message Printer information including printer name make and model An icon if the View as drop down box is set to Tiles which is the default setting Any current alerts for the printer If you click a printer i
344. you want to use 4 If you selected Manual click Settings to open the Color Settings dialog box Adjust the individual settings for text graphics and photographs You can also adjust the general printing settings Click OK 5 Inthe Color Themes area select the RGB Color option that you want to use 6 Click OK The product is now set to use the color options that you selected Using the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box HP Digital Imaging Options make it easy for you to get better photos and images EA NOTE HP Digital Imaging Options are available for Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 The following options are available on the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box e Contrast Enhancement Automatically enhance colors and contrast for washed out photos Click Automatic to allow the printer software to intelligently brighten your photo focusing only on areas that need adjustment e Digital Flash Adjust the exposure in dark areas of photos to bring out detail Click Automatic to allow the printer software to balance lightness and darkness automatically e SmartFocus Enhance the image quality and clarity of low resolution images such as those downloaded from the Internet Click On to allow the printer software to sharpen details in the image automatically e Sharpness Adjust the image sharpness to your preference Click Automatic to allow the printer software to set the level of sharpening for the image aut

HP LaserJet 4700 Printer

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents